Sunteți pe pagina 1din 218

INNERSPEC TECHNOLOGIES

EMAT TRAINING LEVEL I

Name:
Company:

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Introduction to EMAT

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Introduction to Ultrasonic Testing

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Commonly Used Nondestructive Testing Methods

Visual Testing (VT)

Penetrant Testing (PT)

Magnetic Particle Testing (MT)

Eddy Current (ET)

Radiographic Testing (RT)

Ultrasonic Testing (UT)


Volumetric Inspection
One-Side Access
Safe

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Ultrasonic Testing uses waves that propagate through space


and time
Types of Waves:
According to audibility
(frequency):
Subsonic: Below 20Hz
Audible: >20Hz and <20KHz
Ultrasonic: >20KHz
Other classifications:
Frequency, wavelength
Type of particle motion and
velocity
Phase and Group velocities
Bulk or Guided

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Wavelength is related to frequency/period and speed, and,


among other factors, determine the sensitivity and resolution

Frequency & Wavelength:


Wavelength (): Is the distance
between two sequential crests
(or troughs)
Period (): Is the time for a
complete cycle for an oscillation
of a wave
Frequency (): Is how many
periods per unit of time
(normally 1s). Normally
measured in Hertz

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The particle motion determines how the wave moves through


the medium. Particle energy/velocity will determine
amplitude

Particle Motion:
The particle motion in the
medium defines the type of
wave
The energy/velocity of each
particle determines the
amplitude
Velocity is measured in mm/s
for ultrasound

www.innerspec.com

Vertical Displacement in a
simple sinusoidal wave

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The sound velocity varies with the material and type of wave
mode

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Waves that propagate in a medium without boundaries or


constraints, are usually referred to as Bulk Waves

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Longitudinal and Shear are the most common Bulk Waves.


Shear with horizontal polarization are normally used only with
EMAT
Bulk Waves

Particle Motion

Longitudinal

Parallel to
wave direction

(also called
compression or P)

www.innerspec.com

Shear
Vertical

Perpendicular
to wave
direction

Shear
Horizontal

Perpendicular
to wave
direction on a
horizontal
plane

Demonstration

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Bulk waves can be generated with multiple transducer


arrangements

Pulse Echo

Normal Beam

Pitch Catch

Angle Beam

www.innerspec.com

Contact Test

Immersion Test

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

10

_ M

a c r o s

Ultrasonic Phased Array is used to increase coverage and


sensitivity and facilitate deployment
Each transducer contains multiple elements, which can be individually
controlled for sound generation and reception
Phased array may achieve better sensitivity and resolution, and is more
flexible and efficient to scan than conventional single-element transducers

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

11

_ M

a c r o s

Time of Flight Diffraction is an advanced technique used for


sizing defects
Used primarily to size defects
Pitch-catch sensor configuration
Use Tip diffracted signal for defect detection and sizing

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

12

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Waves that propagate constrained by boundaries are usually


referred to as Guided Waves

Guided Waves:
What can be a waveguide?
A surface
A plate,
A rod, tube, pipe
Rail or other structure
In ultrasound, the practical
range of guided waves can vary
from centimetres to tens of
meters

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

13

_ M

a c r o s

Phase and Group velocities are used for transducer design


and signal interpretation
Types of Waves:
Phase Velocity. Velocity at
which the phase of any one
component of the wave
propagates. For ultrasound, it is
measured in Km/s and it varies
with the medium and type of
particle motion

Group Velocity. Velocity at


which variations in the shape of
the waves amplitude (known as
the modulation or envelope of
the wave) propagate in space.
Velocity at which energy or
information is conveyed along
the wave
www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

14

_ M

a c r o s

The dispersion curves show the types of wave modes that


can be excited in a given structure
Each curve represent a wave
mode
Each point on the curve can be
used for inspection
The behaviour and results will
vary with each mode and
point/frequency
Appropriate mode and
point/frequency selection is key
for optimal results
Example:
Mode: Lamb Waves
Material: 0.1 carbon steel plate
Coil Spacing: 0.2
Wavelength: 0.4

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

15

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The dispersion curves of Shear Horizontal are easier to


interpret than Lamb Waves and very versatile in production
Velocity of SH0 mode is
independent of frequency
This mode will be present in a
wide range of thicknesses
Easy to interpret and use in
production

Example:
Mode: SH
Material: 0.1 carbon steel plate

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

16

_ M

a c r o s

Ultrasonic Testing Options

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

17

_ M

a c r o s

Piezoelectric Transducers are the most common way to


generate ultrasound
Sound waves are generated from the vibration of a piezoelectric material,
which are subsequently transmitted into the part through a matching layer
(normally a liquid couplant)
Sound waves are detected when they strike the piezoelectric material,
inducing a voltage variation that is measured with an ultrasonic receiver
Commonly used in medicine and NDT, they are efficient, inexpensive and
available from many manufacturers

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

18

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Air-coupled piezoelectric transducers are a non-contact


alternative for some materials and applications

Specially designed piezocomposite for low acoustic


impedance with air
Matching layer designed to
couple sound through air
Normally used with low
frequencies to detect coarse
defects
Typical applications include
inspection of composites,
ceramics, concrete, and wood
Not practical for metals

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

19

_ M

a c r o s

Laser generation is also available as a non-contact ultrasonic


technique
Ultrasonic waves are generated with high-energy laser pulses on the material
Two generation mechanisms; ablation and thermal elasticity
Wave reception can be achieved using a receiving laser beam or other
ultrasonic transducers
Good for non-contact and high temperature applications, although they are
normally slow, expensive, and can be dangerous for the operators

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

20

_ M

a c r o s

While Piezoelectric UT uses a crystal to generate the


ultrasound, an Electro Magnetic Acoustic Transducer (EMAT)
generates the sound in the part inspected

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

21

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT enjoys all the benefits of UT plus other particular


advantages
Ultrasonic Technique

Volumetric Inspection
One-Side Access
Meets UT Standards
Safe

Ultrasound is Generated in the Part Inspected


Dry Inspection
(no couplant)

Insensitive to
Surface Conditions

Easier Probe
Deployment

Easy to Automate
and Integrate in
Production
No Couplant
Induced Errors
High Inspection
Speeds (up to 60
m/min)
Capable of High and
Sub-Zero
Temperatures

Capable of
Inspecting Rough,
Dirty (Oily/Wet),
Oxidized or Uneven
Surfaces

No Signal Variations
from Probe to Probe
Small Changes in
Probe Angle do not
Affect Results (e.g.
part curvature)

Unique Wave Modes

Capable of
Generating
Horizontally
Polarized Shear
Wave Energy
Guided Waves
(Especially
Advantageous for
Weld Inspection)

Challenges
More Power Required

Lower Signal-to-Noise

www.innerspec.com

Larger Sensors
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

22

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT can be used on most metals and geometries for all the
standard UT applications

Type of Inspection
Flaw Detection
Points (1D)
Seams (2D)
Surfaces (2D)
Volumes (3D)
Thickness &
Distances
Material Properties
Stress/Anisotropy
Nodularity
R-Value

www.innerspec.com

Material

Geometries

Electrical
Discrete and
Conductors
Continuous
Ferrous: Carbon
Geometries
Steel, Stainless
Plates (thin and
Steel, Nickel,
thick)
Cobalt
Cylinders, Rods
Non-Ferrous:
Tubes (round,
Aluminum, Copper,
square or others)
Brass, Uranium and
Structural Elements
most other metals

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

23

_ M

a c r o s

Introduction to EMAT

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

24

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT can generate the same wave modes as piezoelectric


transducers, plus some unique ones
Boundary

Beam
Orientation

Wave
Mode

Technique

Longitudinal

Piezo
EMAT

Shear
Horizontal

EMAT1

Shear
Vertical

Piezo
EMAT

Flaw Detection

Shear
Horizontal

EMAT1

Flaw Detection, including austenitic


materials

Rayleigh

Piezo
EMAT2

Flaw Detection (surface)

Piezo
EMAT2

Flaw (including Corrosion)


Detection
Velocity and Properties
Measurements

EMAT1

Flaw (including Corrosion)


Detection
Velocity and Properties
Measurements

Normal
Bulk

Main
Applications
Thickness and Velocity
Measurements
Flaw Detection
Properties Measurement

Angled

Surface

Lamb
Guided
1 Practical generation is restricted to EMAT
2 Very efficient generation with EMAT

Volumetric

Shear
Horizontal
1 Practical generation is restricted to EMAT
2 Very efficient generation with EMAT
www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

25

_ M

a c r o s

There are four basic requirements to generate an ultrasonic


signal with EMAT
Conductive Material: EMAT
works on any conductive
material (ferrous and nonferrous)
Electrical Field: Generated
with an EMAT coil
Magnetic Field: Generated
with a permanent magnet or an
electromagnet
Proximity: Although EMAT is a
non-contact technique, the
transducer needs to be in close
proximity to the material
inspected. The distance (lift-off),
varies depending on the
technique

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

26

_ M

a c r o s

Generation of sound with Lorentz forces is equivalent to the


operation of an electric motor
Ultrasound Generation:
During transmission, the flowing
current (I) generates an equal
and opposing eddy current (Je)
in the surface of the part
When the eddy current is under
a magnetic field (B), a
mechanical force (F) is
generated in the material
causing particle displacement
For reception, the opposite
effect takes place. The particle
displacement with velocity (v)
under a magnetic field (B)
generates a voltage in the
receiving coil

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

27

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Orientation of the magnetic field changes the type of EMAT

Types of EMAT:

Lorentz Force EMAT

In Lorentz EMAT, the magnetic


field is perpendicular to the
eddy currents and takes
advantage primarily of Lorentz
forces (F=JxB)
In Magnetostrictive EMAT, a
tangential, planar magnetic field
creates magnetostrictive strains
that interact with the dynamic
fields induced by the coil

N
S
x x x
x x x

Magnetostrictive EMAT

S
N

N
x x x
x x x

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

28

_ M

a c r o s

The magnetic field can be generated with permanent magnets


or electromagnets
Common
Magnet
Configurations

Appearance

Characteristics

Always On
Powerful rare earth (NdFeB, SmCo)
available
Inexpensive
Difficult to handle for large sensors

Permanent
Magnet

DC
Electromagnet

Pulsed DC
Electromagnet

Turns On and Off several times per


second. Permits scanning of magnetic
materials without attracting the part
Very powerful tangential fields
Large, heavy and costly sensors
Complex electronics drivers
Very efficient for magnetostrictive EMAT
designs

www.innerspec.com

Can be turned On or Off


Very powerful normal fields
Large, heavy and costly sensors
Inexpensive electronics drivers
Very efficient for large areas

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

29

_ M

a c r o s

The eddy currents are generated with coil conductors


wrapped around in concentric or meandering fashion
Common
Applications

www.innerspec.com

Appearance

Characteristics

Normal Beam
Bulk Waves

Three basic shapes; spiral, racetrack


and butterfly
Coil geometry determines wave shape
and characteristics
Coverage ranges usually from 2mm to
25mm
Coil lift-off can be up to 10mm from
material

Angled Beam
Bulk Waves
and
Guided Waves

Meander coils
Coil spacing determines wavelength
Wide range of designs for directing and
focusing the beam
Very limited coil lift-off (especially at
high frequencies)

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

30

10

Introduction to EMAT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

There are many normal beam configurations for different


types of wave modes and polarizations
Coil Type

Wave Mode

Polarization

Spiral Coil

Shear Horizontal

Radial

Racetrack

Shear Horizontal

Linear

Butterfly

Longitudinal

Linear

Configuration

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

31

_ M

a c r o s

Guided wave configurations can be Magnetostrictive or


Lorentz
Coil
Geometry

Wave Mode

Wavelength

Configuration

Magnetostrictive
Meander
and
Racetrack
(spiral)

Shear
Horizontal

RF Coil
spacing or
magnet size
dete rmine
wave length

Magnetostrictive

Lorentz

S
N
S
N
S
N

N
S
N
S
N
S

Lorentz

S
Rayleigh
Meander
Lamb

RF Coil
spacing
dete rmines
wave length

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

32

_ M

a c r o s

Thank You
for your attention

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

33

11

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

High-Performance NDT Solutions


General Presentation 2013

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Table of Contents

Innerspec Technologies, Inc.


Ultrasonic EMAT Integrated Systems
Introduction to EMAT
Inspection of Thin Welds (<12mm) with Guided Waves
Surface and Volumetric Inspection with Guided Waves
Normal Beam (0) Measurement and Inspection
Other Bulk Wave Applications
Piezoelectric & Hybrid Integrated Systems
Standard Equipment
High-Power Instrumentation
Sensors and Accessories
Specialized In-Service Applications
Research & Development

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Innerspec Technologies

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Our Company
US company located in Lynchburg VA with offices in Europe and China,
and representatives and distributors throughout the world
56 patents for NDT applications and equipment
First EMAT (NASA) in 1989. First commercial EMAT in 1994
World leader in High-Power Ultrasound and EMAT with over 200 integrated
systems installed in 25 countries, and the most complete line of standard
equipment
temate and Rollmate product lines

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Innerspec Technologies provides advanced NDT inspection


products and services for field and factory operation
Products & Services:
Integrated systems for
inspection of welds, tubes,
rolls, rods, billets, strip and
plates and many other
application specific solutions
High-Power ultrasonic
instrumentation
Standard EMAT & Specialty
Piezoelectric Sensors and
Accessories
Specialized In-Service
solutions
Research & Development

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Ultrasonic EMAT
Integrated Systems

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Electromagnetic Acoustic Transducer (EMAT) is a fairly


recent ultrasonic technique that is rapidly growing
History:
First recorded Ultrasonic
Testing experiment conducted
by Russian scientist J.Y.
Sokolov in 1929. First patent
for UT equipment in 1931
Initial experiments with EMAT
UT in the 70s
First commercial applications of
EMAT in the 90s
Recent growth thanks to
advancements in technology
and equipment

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

While Piezoelectric UT uses a crystal to generate the


ultrasound, an Electro Magnetic Acoustic Transducer (EMAT)
generates the sound in the part inspected

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT can be used on most metals and geometries for all the
standard UT applications

Type of Inspection
Flaw Detection
Points (1D)
Seams (2D)
Surfaces (2D)
Volumes (3D)
Thickness &
Distances
Material Properties
Stress/Anisotropy
Nodularity
R-Value

www.innerspec.com

Material

Geometries

Electrical
Discrete and
Conductors
Continuous
Ferrous: Carbon
Geometries
Steel, Stainless
Plates (thin and
Steel, Nickel,
thick)
Cobalt
Cylinders, Rods
Non-Ferrous:
Tubes (round,
Aluminum, Copper,
square or others)
Brass, Uranium and
Structural Elements
most other metals

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT enjoys all the benefits of UT plus other particular


advantages
Ultrasonic Technique

Volumetric Inspection
One-Side Access
Meets UT Standards
Safe

Ultrasound is Generated in the Part Inspected


Dry Inspection
(no couplant)

Insensitive to
Surface Conditions

Easier Probe
Deployment

Easy to Automate
and Integrate in
Production
No Couplant
Induced Errors
High Inspection
Speeds (up to 60
m/s)
Capable of High and
Sub-Zero
Temperatures

Capable of
Inspecting Rough,
Dirty (Oily/Wet),
Oxidized or Uneven
Surfaces

No Signal Variations
from Probe to Probe
Small Changes in
Probe Angle do not
Affect Results (e.g.
part curvature)

Unique Wave Modes

Capable of
Generating
Horizontally
Polarized Shear
Wave Energy
Guided Waves
(Especially
Advantageous for
Weld Inspection)

Challenges
More Power Required

Lower Signal-to-Noise

www.innerspec.com

Larger Sensors
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

10

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT can generate the same wave modes as piezoelectric


transducers, plus some unique ones
Boundary

Beam
Orientation

Wave
Mode

Technique

Longitudinal

Piezo
EMAT

Shear
Horizontal

EMAT1

Shear
Vertical

Piezo
EMAT

Flaw Detection

Shear
Horizontal

EMAT1

Flaw Detection, including austenitic


materials

Rayleigh

Piezo
EMAT2

Flaw Detection (surface)

Piezo
EMAT2

Flaw (including Corrosion)


Detection
Velocity and Properties
Measurements

EMAT1

Flaw (including Corrosion)


Detection
Velocity and Properties
Measurements

Normal
Bulk

Main
Applications
Thickness and Velocity
Measurements
Flaw Detection
Properties Measurement

Angled

Surface

Lamb
Guided
1 Practical generation is restricted to EMAT
2 Very efficient generation with EMAT

Volumetric

Shear
Horizontal
1 Practical generation is restricted to EMAT
2 Very efficient generation with EMAT
www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

11

_ M

a c r o s

Inspection of Thin Welds (<12mm)


with Guided Waves (EMAT)

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

12

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Waves that propagate constrained by boundaries are usually


referred to as Guided Waves
Guided Waves:
What can be a waveguide?
A surface
A plate,
A rod, tube, pipe
Rail or other structure
In ultrasound, the practical
range of guided waves can vary
from centimetres to tens of
meters

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

13

_ M

a c r o s

The most common Guided Waves are Rayleigh, Lamb and


Shear Horizontal
Guided
Waves

Particle
Motion

Rayleigh
or
Surface

Elliptical,
penetrating
one wave
length

Lamb

Asymmetrical
or
Symmetrical

Shear
Horizontal

Perpendicular
to wave
direction on a
horizontal
plane

www.innerspec.com

Graphic Depiction

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

14

_ M

a c r o s

With piezoelectric ultrasonics, weld inspection is performed


using a Shear Vertical Wave (SV)
Characteristics:
The transducer converts electric
into acoustic energy and sends
it to the part
To allow transmission, the
transducer needs to be coupled
to the part (normally using a
liquid)
The angle is usually between
30 and 60 from the normal
beam
Positioning of the probe is
critical to obtain an accurate
inspection

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

15

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Shear Horizontal (SH) at 90 degrees and Lamb generate


guided waves that are uniquely suited for weld inspection up
to 10mm thick
Characteristics:
Only available with EMAT for
practical purposes
The SH/Lamb wave fills up the
volume of the material
independent of thickness
No rastering motion or
phased array of sensors
necessary
Separate transmitter and
receiver permits normalization
of the signal (self-calibration)
Less sensitive to probe
positioning

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

16

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Guided waves permit normalization of signal

As the transmitter sends sound, the receiver measures the amount of sound induced in the
part or DT (e.g. DT=100 units)
The defect reflects sound back and is measured by the same receiver or RT (e.g. RT=50
units)
The equipment shows the normalized signal on the screen in percentage

The transmitter induces less sound due to any reason (material, lift-off, power fluctuation),
the receiver measures this amount (e.g. DT=50 units)
The same size defect reflects less sound back (e.g. RT=25 units)
The normalized signal shows the same response for the same size defect, regardless of the
amount of sound induced
www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

17

_ M

a c r o s

Using Guided Waves, EMATs have significant advantages


over conventional UT for thin weld inspection, especially for
automated environments
Characteristics

EMAT UT

Piezoelectric UT

Permits inspection of
<6mm Thick Materials

Yes

Limited

Dry (No couplant)

Yes

No

Impervious to surface
contamination

Yes

No

Speed

+2 m/s

Couplant limited

Continuous SelfCalibration

Yes

No

Very High

Couplant and noise


dependent

Consistency and
Quality of Readings

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

18

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Guided Waves can be applied to most welding techniques


and applications
Applications:
Laser Butt Welds
Mash Welds
Laser Lap Welds
Friction Stir
ERW
TIG & MIG
Forged Welds
Brazed Welds
Others

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

19

_ M

a c r o s

The temate Si-CJ is designed for inspecting weld seams in


steel coils
Characteristics:
In-line & fully automated
Detects internal voids, laps,
strip misalignment, and poor
trim quality
Inspects while trimming with no
additional cycle time
Optional weld monitoring
system
Endorsed by Miebach and
Taylor Winfield, installs on any
welder

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

20

_ M

a c r o s

The temate Si-WB is designed for inspecting tailor welded


blanks
Characteristics:
In-line or off-line installation
inspects linear and curvilinear
welds
Two channel system detect
planar and point defects
independently
Capable of inspecting at high
speeds (1 m/s)
One system supports up to
three sensor heads
Most proven and reliable
system in the market

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

21

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Guided waves fill the volume of the blank so the probe can be
located on top or bottom of the blank

temate
Si-WB
Probe

Alternate
Probe
Location

Weld Defect

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

22

_ M

a c r o s

The probe scans along the weld line to provide complete


seam inspection
Self-calibrated. The system automatically senses and compensates for
different steel grades and other process changes

RT/DT

Scan
Weld
Sensor

Send Signal
(DT)

Return Signal
(RT)

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

23

_ M

a c r o s

Weld flaws can be classified in point and planar defects


Planar Defects

Lack of Penetration

Lack of Fusion

Mismatch

Concavity

Point Defects

Porosity
www.innerspec.com

Pinhole
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

24

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Point and planar defects reflect sound differently

Point
Defect

Planar
Defect

Weld Seam

Receiver

Transmitter

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

25

_ M

a c r o s

The proprietary EMAT sensor is designed to discriminate


between both types of defects

Point Defect Channels

Planar Defect Channel

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

26

_ M

a c r o s

The system provides real time good-weld, bad-weld, results


that require no interpretation by the operator

Point Channel

www.innerspec.com

Planar Channel

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

27

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate Si-MWC system is designed for inspecting


narrow-lap seam planished welds
Characteristics:
Proprietary technology designed
for post-weld inspection of Mash
Seam Welds (RSEW-MS)
Detects partial and full disbond,
porosity, inclusions, poor
planishing, and weld skips

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

28

The temate Si-MWC


1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The probe scans along the weld line to provide complete


seam inspection
Sensor inspects from the bottom of the strip
Self-calibrated. The system automatically senses and compensates for
different steel grades and other process changes

temate
Si-MWC
Probe

www.innerspec.com

Weld Defect

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

29

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Guided Waves permits inspection of butt welds regardless of


the welding technique
Application 1: ERW Tubes
Designed to inspect tubes
0.7-7.5mm thick with diameters
ranging from 25 to 125mm
Detects notch type defects with
10% of thickness and 25mm in
length
Installed immediately after
welding
One sensor design covers all
ranges of tubes
Off-line calibration using the
same equipment
Easy to install and operate

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

30

10

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Guided Waves permits inspection of butt welds regardless of


the welding technique
Application 3: Girth Welds
In-line or off-line installation
One or two channel system with
full volumetric and independent
weld-root inspection
Meets API requirements
Capable of inspecting welds
produced with different welding
techniques
Different rotating devices
available including intrinsically
safe enclosed scanners

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

31

_ M

a c r o s

Surface and Thin-Volumetric Inspection


with Guided Waves (EMAT)

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

32

_ M

a c r o s

Guided waves can also be used for surface or volumetric


inspection of tubes, plates and rods
Characteristics:
Permits coverage of large areas
with a limited number of sensors
Separate transmitter and
receiver permits normalization
of the signal
Capable of detecting surface
and internal defects
Ideal for integration in
automated environments or
where fast scanning is required

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

33

11

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT permits surface inspection of tubes and round and


square billets at high temperatures, and at much lower cost
than other automated techniques (EC, IRT)
Characteristics:
Capable of detecting defects
from 0 to 3mm on billets and
tubes
A combination of both
attenuation and reflection
techniques can detect all the
longitudinal cracks, and most
other defects (roughness,
folding, etc.)
Easy to install, simple to
operate with very low
maintenance and operating
costs compared to other
methods

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

34

_ M

a c r o s

For inspection of plates, ingots and slabs, EMAT replace


vision systems at a fraction of the cost, and provides the
ability to detect tight cracks
Characteristics:
Capable of covering large
surfaces with a few sensors and
detect defects perpendicular to
sensor orientation
Installation for copper plates
(picture) uses two sensors per
side to detect surface and subsurface cracks 25mm (L) x
0.25mm (H) on a 940mm wide
plate
Replaced machine vision
system which couldnt detect
surface cracks at a fraction of
the cost

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

35

_ M

a c r o s

The temate ST-SC(HR) is designed for full volumetric


inspection of thin strip (<12mm) using guided waves
Application I: Steel Coils
In-line or off-line installation
100% full volumetric inspection
Multi-channel system for
different gage materials
Detects internal defects at
production speeds (over
400m/min)
Custom designed for the each
customers specific
requirements

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

36

12

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The dual sensor technique detects defects in the rolling


direction using Guided Waves
Characteristics:
Two sensors send plate waves from center to edges of strip
Inspects strip up to 7mm, pickled and non-pickled
Detects defects in the rolling direction as shallow as 0.1mm
Minimum defect length detection of 7mm at maximum line speeds
100% volumetric inspection except for small band at the edge
Cost efficient and reliable technique

Dual Sensor System


www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

37

_ M

a c r o s

Guided waves can be also be applied to laminated materials


such as coin stock
temate ST-LA(CS):
Three-layer nickel/brass and
copper laminated composite
used for coin stock
Detects delaminations in any of
the layers
Multi-channel system for
different gage materials
Detects internal defects at
production speeds (over
400m/min)
Custom designed for the each
customers specific
requirements

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

38

_ M

a c r o s

The temate Ri is designed for internal inspection of rods


using Guided Waves
Characteristics:
In-line or off-line installation
Complete internal inspection
Adaptable to different rod
geometries and sizes

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

39

13

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Normal Beam (0)


Measurement and Inspection (EMAT)

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

40

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT is ideally suited for normal beam inspection in rough


environments
Characteristics:
Lack of couplant permits
inspection of very hot and very
cold materials
Impervious to surface conditions
Sensors are less sensitive to
mechanical alignment and have
very consistent performance
Capable of inspecting at great
speeds

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

41

_ M

a c r o s

The temate IB is used to inspect large I-Beams

Characteristics:
68 sensors perform
simultaneous inspection of
flanges and web at 100fpm
Designed to detect 6mm
diameter defects in 125mm
thick material. Meets ASTM
898/A 898M
Completely integrated
mechanical actuators adapt
vertically and horizontally to the
I-beam as it moves along the
sensor

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

42

14

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate Pi-NB inspects plates/skelp ranging from 0.25


(6mm) to 4 (100mm)
Characteristics:
Up to 350 sensors perform
simultaneous inspection of a
plate moving at 100fpm
Designed to detect 5mm flat
bottom holes anywhere within
1.5mm from the top and bottom
(Meets ASTM 578/A578M-96
and A435A and EN10160)
Independent edge detection
(2mm from edge)

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

43

_ M

a c r o s

The temate SB inspects square billets for defects as small


as 2mm in diameter
Characteristics:
64 sensors perform
simultaneous inspection of
Square Billet from 4 sides at up
to 200fpm
Designed to detect 2mm
diameter fbh at 2mm from each
surface in a carbon steel square
billet 150mm thick. Meets MILSTD-2154
Actuator adapts to +/- 3
squareness between billet
faces, +/- 5 of billet twist and
50mm of vertical and/or
horizontal movement on 12
meters

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

44

_ M

a c r o s

The temate TG-IL is designed for measuring thickness in


production environments for a number of applications
Application: Tubes
Ambient and high-temperature
probes for continuous
measurement of materials up to
1000C
Integrated temperature
correction for maximum
accuracy
Resolution down to 0.0005"
(0.013mm)
Integration for single-line, multiline or 100% coverage (rotating
tube and traversing sensor)
Results available in strip-chart,
C-Scan and max-min thickness
eccentricity profiles

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

45

15

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Other Bulk Wave Applications


(EMAT)

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

46

_ M

a c r o s

The temate BW-LT(ERW) provides inspection of ERW tubes


of any thickness immediately after welding
Characteristics:
Installs immediately after welder
to provide immediate feedback
on the quality of the weld
without couplant and potentially
damaging quenching
Detects and differentiates ID
and OD notch-type defects
12mm long and 5% deep, and
1.3mm holes at speeds of up to
1.5m/s. Meets API Standards
Sensor positioning can be
raised and rotated out of the
tube line for calibration and
maintenance
Independent PLC for line
integration
Automated flaw marking option
www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

47

_ M

a c r o s

Piezoelectric & Hybrid


Integrated Systems

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

48

16

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The patented Rollmate installs on grinders and is designed


for inspection of steel mill rolls and aluminum casters
Characteristics:
Modular design with up to 3
independent sensor heads and
four different inspection options
including surface and subsurface axial and
circumferential, core-shell
disbond and bruise detection
Traditional (actuator) and new
caliper mounting options
Performs inspection while
grinding
Insensitive to roll magnetism,
inspects rolls of any alloy

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

49

_ M

a c r o s

In addition to the standard surface and sub-surface, the new


Rollmate can be complemented with core-shell disbond and
bruise detection sensor modules

1
3
1
2

Surface Mode (0-2mm)*

Sub-Surface Mode (2-58mm)*

Core-Shell Disbond

Bruise Detection
* Axial and Circumferential Options Available

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

50

_ M

a c r o s

Portable & Standard Equipment

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

51

17

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Innerspec offers a complete line of the most powerful


ultrasonic instruments in the market
Instrumentation:
Portable instruments temate
PowerBox series, Rackmount
and PXI Pulser/Receivers, Tone
Burst Amplifiers, and Magnet
Pulsers
Designed for EMAT, aircoupled, and other high-power
UT applications with up to 20kW
of power per channel
Frequencies from 50kHz to
20MHz
PowerUT software

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

52

_ M

a c r o s

Our catalog of EMAT Sensors & Accessories is the first and


only industry standard for EMAT applications
EMAT Sensors & Accessories:
Shear Horizontal and
Longitudinal normal beam for up
to 1000C
Shear Horizontal and Shear
Vertical angled beam
Guided waves (Shear, Lamb
and Rayleigh)
Phased array
Measurement of material
properties (stress, nodularity,
bolt-load)
Signal conditioning electronics,
encoders, EMAT software, and
other accessories

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

53

_ M

a c r o s

In-Service Applications

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

54

18

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate PowerBox H provides maximum power and large


system features in a battery operated instrument
EMAT Sensors & Accessories:
1 Channel tone burst (up to 5
cycles) with 8kW of power and
1200Vpp
100kHZ to 6MHz Bandwidth
Permits running any transducer
including EMAT, PZT and aircoupled
Encoder, Thermocouple and IO
inputs
PC software and remote
operation through ethernet
A, B, C and Line Scan formats
Optional software modules for
stress, thin-weld, bolt-load and
multi-channel measurements
www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

55

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The list of applications for the temate PowerBox H all require


and take advantage of the high-power instrumentation
UT Type

Wave Type

Normal Beam

Angled Beam

Shear Horizontal for austenitic weld inspection


Shear Horizontal for 30-90 inspections (e.g. weld overlays)
Shear Vertical for high and low temperatures, coated, rough

Guided Waves

Corrosion detection with Shear and Lamb waves


Surface inspections (strip, rolls, tubes, billets, weld
overlays)
Thin weld inspection (under 6mm)

Multi-Sensor
Normal Beam

Normal Beam
Flexible

Thin-profile, flexible, dry-coupled sensors


Scanning, dry-coupled wheel

EMAT

Piezoelectric

Applications

Normal Beam &


Angled Beam
Normal Beam
Air-Coupled

Thickness Measurement
High and low temperatures (-30C to 650C)
Coated, painted and rough surfaces (3-4mm lift-off)
Flaw and corrosion detection and measurement

Stress/anisotropy measurement
Bolt-load with single and double wave mode (L and SH)
Nodularity measurements
Corrosion monitoring (8 Channel BAND)

PZT transducers for highly-attenuative materials (forgings,


castings, plastics, composites, fiberglass
Honey-comb, ceramics, composites with air-coupled
transducers (under development)

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

56

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate PowerBox 1, 2 & 8 provide high-power and duty


cycle for the most demanding applications
tema te
Powe rBox 1

temate
PowerBox 2

Channels

Bandwidth

50kHz to 6MHz

50kHz to 6MHz

100kHz to 6MHz

RF Pulser

Spike, Toneburst Waveforms


8 kW Power Output
1200Vpp @ 25App into 50
1% Maximum Duty

Magnet Pulser

Receivers

P/R Modes
A/D Converters
Filtering

Spike, Toneburst Waveforms


Spike, Toneburst Waveforms
8 kW Power Output per Channel 2.5-20 kW Power Output per Channel
1200Vpp @ 25App into 50
200Vpp to 2000Vpp @ 40App into 50
1% Max. Duty per Channel
1% Max. Duty per Channel

45A Peak Current


9 kW Peak Power
1% Maximum Duty
50 Input Impedance
-20 dB to 60 dB Gain
0.3 dB Gain Resolution
8 Low Pass RF Filters;
(Off, .1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)
8 High Pass RF Filters;
(Off, .1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)

NA

NA

50 Input Impedance
-20 dB to 60 dB Gain
0.3 dB Gain Resolution
8 Low Pass RF Filters;
(Off, .1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)
8 High Pass RF Filters;
(Off, .1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)

50 Input Impedance
-20 dB to 60 dB Gain
0.3 dB Gain Resolution
8 Low Pass RF Filters;
(Off, . 1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)
8 High Pass RF Filters;
(Off, . 1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)

Pulse-Echo, Pitch-Catch

Pulse-Echo, Pitch-Catch

Pulse-Echo, Pitch-Catch

14-bit, 100MHz

14-bit, 100MHz

14-bit, 100MHz

IIR/FIR Digital Filters

IIR/FIR Digital Filters

IIR/FIR Digital Filters

A/B Quadrature or
Clock/Direction

A/B Quadrature or Clock/Direction

Encoder Interface A/B Quadrature or Clock/Direction

www.innerspec.com

temate
PowerBox 8

Alarms & I/O

12 User Programmable TTL I/O

12 User Programmable TTL I/O

Power Input

100-240VAC, 47-63Hz

100-240VAC, 47-63Hz

12 Us er Programmable TTL I/O


100-240VAC, 47-63Hz

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

57

19

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Corrosion Measurement &


Boiler Tube Inspection
temate TG-IS(C), temate TG-IS(B)

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

58

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate TG-IS(B) is especially designed to detect wall


loss and hydrogen damage in boiler tubes
Characteristics:
Measures wall thickness and
detects HCC and SCC along
the complete tube
Hand-held probe with integrated
encoder for accurate mapping
of tube wall
Light indicators on probe to alert
of wall loss or damage without
looking at the screen
Complete reporting software

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

59

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate TG-IS(B) provides thickness readings by measuring


ultrasonic Time-Of-Flight
Largest signal hump- corresponds to the wave form that is being tracked
Smaller signals include side lobes and secondary wave modes
Thickness is measured by monitoring changes in position of largest hump
that correspond to different lengths of ultrasonic path (Time-Of-Flight)

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

60

20

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate MRUT (Medium-Range UT) is designed for


pipeline and tank inspection
Characteristics:
Detects cracks, pits and
corrosion on pipes and tanks
Circumferential scan provides
full volumetric inspection of
pipelines (including under
supports) at fast inspection
speeds (150mm/s)
Axial scan permits inspection of
supports and soil interfaces up
to 1m deep
In tank configuration, the
system scans up to 1m per pass
Custom scanner adapts to all
configurations and can inspect
in any orientation (horizontal,
up, down or sideways)
www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

61

_ M

a c r o s

The temate MRUT provides two different inspection types :

Axial Scan
The Sensor travels axially
straddling the OD of the pipe
Transmitter sends Lamb waves
around the pipe in both
directions
The receiver detects the sound,
measuring the amplitude loss
and/or change in time of flight
360 Scan of pipe with speed of
approximately 150mm per
second
Ideal for diameters between 6
(150mm) and 24 (600mm)

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

62

_ M

a c r o s

temate MRUT Axial Scan


Corroded walls cause Time-Of-Flight shifts and decreases in amplitude
Time-Of-Flight shifts are caused by velocity changes when traveling
through the thinner portion of the pipe

Amplitude

Decreases in amplitude are caused by energy loss reflected from corroded


areas

Time

Corroded Wall

www.innerspec.com

Amplitude

No Corrosion

Time

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

63

21

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate MRUT provides two different inspection types :

Circumferential Scan
Used mainly for soil-to-air
interface and under pipe
supports
Scanning performed normally
using S1 Lamb Wave mode
Tandem transmit and receive
sensors travel circumferentially
around the pipe
Sensors configured in pulseecho will detect reflections from
defects along the line
Specially designed sensor send
sound only in one direction
Signal is normalized for autocalibration
www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

64

_ M

a c r o s

temate MRUT Circumferential Scan


Pitch-catch or pulse-echo method
First signal picked up by the receiver is used for normalization

Amplitude

Reflection form an indication will come later in the time domain

Time

Amplitude

No Corrosion

Corroded Wall

www.innerspec.com

Signal directly from


transmitter used for
normalization

Reflection from the


indication

Time

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

65

_ M

a c r o s

Austenitic Weld Inspection


with Phased Array
temate PA-W

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

66

22

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Austenitic welds are extremely difficult to inspect with


conventional ultrasound
Austenitic Welds:
Austenitic stainless steel is
widely used in nuclear,
petrochemical, and process
industries
Most common combinations
include stainless to stainless
steel, stainless to carbon steel
with inconel butter, and 300
series stainless to inconel
Austenitic welds have a strongly
textured columnar grain
structure that scatter ultrasonic
energy, and skew Shear Vertical
and Longitudinal waves
generated by conventional
piezoelectric systems

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

67

_ M

a c r o s

The temate PA-W permits inspection of austenitic welds and


provides some unique features
Applications:
Indicated for applications that
require SH waves, no couplant
(e.g. high-temperature) or
unique scanning angles
SH Waves:
Do not mode convert in
isotropic materials
Penetrate columnar grains
with minimum attenuation,
and permit inspection of both
sides of the weld from one
position
Capable of inspecting up to
200C without active cooling
Permits scanning any angle
from 0 to 90
www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

68

_ M

a c r o s

Research & Development

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

69

23

IT 2013

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Our R&D team designs solutions using proprietary simulation


and analysis tools
Research & Development:
Highly-trained specialists in technique development, electronics, software and
mechanical design
Proprietary software tools for beam profile simulation, dispersion curves for
plates, curved surfaces and rods (GWAT), and finite Element Modeling of bulk
and guided waves,
Thermal analysis for high-temperature EMAT applications
Over 22 years of experience designing custom systems

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

70

_ M

a c r o s

Thank You
for your attention

www.innerspec.com

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

71

24

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

NDT Solutions for


In-Service Inspections

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Table of Contents

Innerspec Technologies, Inc.


Company
Products & Services
Introduction to EMAT
In-Service Applications for temate PowerBox H
Normal Beam
Angled Beam
Guided Waves
Properties Measurement
Piezoelectric
In-Service Applications for temate PowerBox 1, 2 & 8
Corrosion Detection
Corrosion Measurement and Boiler Tube Inspection
Austenitic Weld Inspection with Phased Array

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Innerspec Technologies

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Our Company
US company located in Lynchburg VA with offices in Europe and China,
and representatives and distributors throughout the world
56 patents for NDT applications and equipment
First EMAT (NASA) in 1989. First commercial EMAT in 1994
World leader in High-Power Ultrasound and EMAT with over 200 integrated
systems installed in 25 countries, and the most complete line of standard
equipment
temate and Rollmate product lines

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Innerspec Technologies provides advanced NDT inspection


products and services for field and factory operation
Products & Services:
Integrated systems for
inspection of welds, tubes, rolls,
rods, billets, strip and plates and
many other application specific
solutions
High-Power ultrasonic
instrumentation
Standard EMAT & Specialty
Piezoelectric Sensors and
Accessories
Specialized In-Service solutions
Research & Development

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Introduction to EMAT

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

While Piezoelectric UT uses a crystal to generate the


ultrasound, an Electro Magnetic Acoustic Transducer
(EMAT) generates the sound in the part inspected

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT can be used on most metals and geometries for all


the standard UT applications

Type of Inspection
Flaw Detection
Points (1D)
Seams (2D)
Surfaces (2D)
Volumes (3D)
Thickness &
Distances
Material Properties
Stress/Anisotropy
Nodularity
R-Value

Material

Geometries

Electrical
Discrete and
Conductors
Continuous
Ferrous: Carbon
Geometries
Steel, Stainless
Plates (thin and
Steel, Nickel,
thick)
Cobalt
Cylinders, Rods
Non-Ferrous:
Tubes (round,
Aluminum, Copper,
square or others)
Brass, Uranium and
Structural Elements
most other metals

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT enjoys all the benefits of UT plus other particular


advantages
Ultrasonic Te chnique

Volumetric Inspection
One-Side Access
Meets UT Standards
Safe

Ultrasound is Generated in the Part Inspected


Dry Inspection
(no couplant)

Insensitive to
Surface Conditions

Easier Probe
Deployment

Easy to Automate
and Integrate in
Production
No Couplant
Induced Errors
High Inspection
Speeds (up to 60
m/s)
Capable of High and
Sub-Zero
Temperatures

Capable of
Inspecting Rough,
Dirty (Oily/Wet),
Oxidized or Uneven
Surfaces

No Signal Variations
from Probe to Probe
Small Changes in
Probe Angle do not
Affect Results (e.g.
part curvature)

Unique Wave Modes

Capable of
Generating
Horizontally
Polarized Shear
Wave Energy
Guided Waves
(Especially
Advantageous for
Weld Inspection)

Challenges
More Power Required
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

Lower Signal-to-Noise

Larger Sensors
9

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

High-Power Instrumentation

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

10

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

In 2011, Innerspec introduced the temate PowerBox H,


the most powerful handheld UT instrument in the market
temate PowerBox H

Design Goals
Capable of running any
EMAT sensor including bulk
waves (normal, angled) and
guided waves (Lamb, SH,
Rayleigh)
Capable of running PVDF,
PZT and air-Coupled

1 Channel tone burst (up to 5 cycles) with 8kW of power in two


power settings (600Vpp and 1200Vpp)
100kHz to 6MHz Bandwidth
Pulse/Echo and Pitch/Catch operation
Built in pulse/echo signal conditioning for 1.5-3MHz
Signal conditioning attachment with independent tuning modules
to adapt to any type of coil configuration

Capable of multiplexing up
to 8 sensors, EMAT and
non-EMAT sensors

1:8 Multiplexer attachment with slot for tuning module


Tuning Modules permit matching any transducer including EMAT,
PZT (PVDF), air-coupled

Software and hardware


features available in highend flaw detectors

Handheld and battery


operated

A, B, C and Line Scan formats


Amplitude, TOF and velocity readouts
3 Gates (Calibration, Flaw, Backwall)
DAC Curves
PC software to display and analyze results
Remote control operation through Ethernet
Optional software modules for Stress, Bolt Load and multi-channel
measurements

6 Lbs (2.7 Kgs)


4-8 hours of battery time

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

11

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H System without and with Signal


Conditioning Attachment/Multiplexer

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

12

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The applications all require and take advantage of the


high-power instrumentation
UT Type

Wave Type

Normal Beam

Angled Beam

Shear Horizontal for austenitic weld inspection


Shear Horizontal for 30-90 inspections (e.g. weld overlays)
Shear Vertical for high and low temperatures, coated, rough

Guided Waves

Corrosion detection with Shear and Lamb waves


Surface inspections (strip, rolls, tubes, billets, weld
overlays)
Thin weld inspection (under 6mm)

Multi-Sensor
Normal Beam

Normal Beam
Flexible

Thin-profile, flexible, dry-coupled sensors


Scanning, dry-coupled wheel

EMAT

Piezoelectric

Applications

Normal Beam &


Angled Beam
Normal Beam
Air-Coupled

Thickness Measurement
High and low temperatures (-30C to 650C)
Coated, painted and rough surfaces (3-4mm lift-off)
Flaw and corrosion detection and measurement

Stress/anisotropy measurement
Bolt-load with single and double wave mode (L and SH)
Nodularity measurements
Corrosion monitoring (8 Channel BAND)

PZT transducers for highly-attenuative materials (forgings,


castings, plastics, composites, fiberglass
Honey-comb, ceramics, composites with air-coupled
transducers (under development)

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

13

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Normal Beam with EMAT

Characteristics:
Direction of Propagation:
Perpendicular to the entry wall.
Sensor Configuration: Pulse-echo
(transmitter = receiver) or pitchcatch (transmitter receiver)
Wave modes: Shear Horizontal and
Longitudinal waves in frequencies
ranging from 1.5MHz to 6MHz.
Whereas EMAT can generate both
Shear and Longitudinal waves at 0
degrees, Shear (Horizontal) waves
are easier to generate
Materials Inspected: Ferromagnetic
(SH) and non-ferromagnetic metals
(L and SH)

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

14

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Advantages of EMAT for Normal Beam

EMAT Uniqueness:
Dry and non-contact
Temperatures up to 1000C and
-50C
Fast scanning
Coated surfaces up to 3mm
thick. Greater lift-off can be
achieved depending on material
and type of inspection
Not affected by surface conditions
(wet, oily, rough, oxidized)
Maintains reading when the sensor
face is not parallel to the part
Capable of generating SH as well
as L wave
Ability to select direction of
polarization
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

15

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Normal Beam Standard Equipment with temate


PowerBox H

Thickness Measurement

Normal Beam

Flaw Detection

Corrosion
Monitoring

Thin (<100mm) Thick (>100mm)

Sensor Array

High Temp Spot

Scanning

temate PowerBox H Kit


(US/EU)

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

Signal Multiplexing

NA

NA

NA

NA

279A0009

800A0165/6

Sensors/Magnets (S/M)

S - 274A0165/190

M - 274A0107/144

M - 274A0107/144

M - 274A0107/144

160A0085/160A0086

Roller Kit/ Sensor Fixture

NA

187A0003

187A0003

187A0003

NA

Handle

187A0007

NA

NA

NA

Cable EMAT

232A0123

232A0123

232A0123

232A0123

NA

Thermocouple

281A0001

NA

NA

NA

Included

Encoder

NA

281A0002

281A0002

281A0002

NA

PE-L-S-0.730-0.250 PE-L-B-0.726-0.492 PE-L-B-1.208-0.942

NA

RF Coils

NA

Tuning Module

NA

NA

NA

NA

Wear Surface

NA

510V0005

510V0005

510V0005

NA

Software

NA

NA

NA

NA

400S0014

Comments

Up to 650C

Scanning up to 200C with 274A0144 (80C with 107)

NA
NA

8-Channels Multiplexed

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

16

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Angled Beam with EMAT

Characteristics:
Direction of Propagation: At an
angle from the entry wall
Sensor Configuration: Pulseecho (PE) or pitch-catch (PC)
Wave modes: Shear Horizontal
(PC) at angles from 0 to 90
and Shear Vertical (PE) at
angles from 30 to 50 in
frequencies ranging from
500KHz to 10MHz
Materials Inspected:
Ferromagnetic and nonferromagnetic metals

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

17

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Advantages of EMAT for Angled Beam Inspections

EMAT Uniqueness:
Dry and non-contact
Temperatures up to 200C
and -50C
Fast scanning
Coated surfaces 1-2mm thick
(depending on frequency)
Not affected by surface
conditions (wet, oily, rough,
oxidized)
Capable of generating SH to
inspect austenitic materials
without mode conversion
Capable of generating SH at 90
to inspect top of welds and weld
overlays

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

18

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Angled Beam Standard Equipment with temate


PowerBox H
SH Wave

SV Wave

Austenitic Welds

Non-Austenitic Materials

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

Angled Beam EMAT


temate PowerBox H Kit
(US/EU)
Signal Conditioning

279A0009

279A0009

Sensors/Magnets (S/M)

S - 274A0201

S - 274A0107/144

Roller Kit/ Sensor Fixture

160A0071

Handle

NA

NA

Cable EMAT

232A0123 x2

232A0123 x2

Thermocouple

NA

281A0001

Encoder

NA

RF Coils

Included

Tuning Module

LP-R-600 kHz

281A0001
R-L-M-0.060x12-1.000, R-L-M-0.070x10-1.000, R-L-M-0.080x8-1.000,
R-L-M-0.100x7-1.000, R-L-M-0.120x5-1.000, R-L-M-0.140x6-1.000, R-L-M-0160x5x1.000,
L/SE-PE-M-0.060-3500, L/SE-PE-M-0.070-3000, L/SE-PE-M-0.080-2600,
L/SE-PE-M-0.100-2000L/SE-PE-M-0.120-2000, L/SE-PE-M-0.140-1500, L/SE-PE-M-0.160-1250

Wear Surface

510V0005

510V0005

Software

400S0006 (BEAM)

400S0006 (BEAM)

Comments

0-90

30-50

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

19

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Guided Waves with EMAT

Characteristics:
Direction of Propagation: Parallel to
the entry wall and within the
boundaries of the top and bottom
walls
Volumetric: Fill up the complete
volume (limited to approx. 12mm)
Surface: Penetrate one
wavelength
Sensor Configuration: Pulse-echo
(PE) or pitch-catch (PC)
Wave modes: Shear Horizontal at
90, Lamb waves and Rayleigh
waves in frequencies ranging from
50KHz to 10MHz.
Materials Inspected: Ferromagnetic
and non-ferromagnetic metals
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

20

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Advantages of EMAT Guided Waves

EMAT Uniqueness:
Dry and non-contact
Temperatures up to 200C and 50C
Fast scanning
Coated surfaces 1-3mm thick
(depending on frequency)
Not affected by surface conditions
(wet, oily, rough, oxidized)
Guided waves can cover large areas
with limited sensors
Provide access to hidden areas and
detect defects with attenuation or
reflection techniques
Capable of detecting extremely small
defects (0.03mm cracks) in different
orientations
Ability to normalize the signal for selfcalibration
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

21

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Guided Wave Standard Equipment with temate


PowerBox H
Shear Waves
Guided Waves

Any Thickness

Lamb Type Waves


Volumetric
(0.5mm-12mm)

Surface Waves

0-3mm Weld
Inspection

temate PowerBox H Kit


(US/EU)

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

Signal
Conditioning/Multiplexer

279A0010

279A0010

279A0009

Sensors/Magnets (S/M)

Transmit: S 274A0169
Receive: S 274A0170

M - 274A0107 x2 (x1 for Pulse Echo)

M - 274A0107

Roller Kit/ Sensor Fixture

NA

187A0003 x2 (x1 for Pulse Echo)

Tube Scanner

Circ: 800A0163 Axial: 800A0164

Circ: 800A0163 Axial: 800A0164

NA

Cable EMAT

232A0123 x2

232A0123 x2 (x1 for Pulse Echo)

232A0123 x2

Encoder

281A0002

281A0002

281A0002

800A0165/6

187A0003

RF Coils

Included

See App. Sheet

Tuning Module P/C

XLP-R-250 kHz

See App. Sheet

NA

Tuning Module P/E

NA

See App. Sheet

L-PE-MF-280A0199

Wear Surface

510V0005/6

510V0005/6

510V0006

Software

400S0002 (GWAT)
Non-Leaky Wave Mode

Comments

Corrosion & Flaw in Plates,


Tubes

400S0002 (GWAT)
Leaky, Highly
Sensitive Mode

Surface & Near


Surface

Corrosion & Flaw in Plates, Tubes

280A0199

400S0013
Focused Angled for
Point Defects
Focused Straight for
Planar Defects

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

22

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Properties Measurement with EMAT and Hybrids

Characteristics:
Direction of Propagation:
Perpendicular to the entry wall.
Sensor Configuration: Pulseecho (transmitter = receiver)
Wave modes: Shear Horizontal
with EMAT and Longitudinal
waves with Piezo in frequencies
ranging from 1.5MHz to 6MHz
Materials Inspected:
Ferromagnetic and nonferromagnetic metals

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

23

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Advantages of Properties Measurement with EMAT and


Hybrids
EMAT Uniqueness:
Stress Measurement
Dry and non-contact
Linearly polarized SH waves
provide great accuracy of TOF
Complete, thru-thickness
stress measurement
Bolt-Load and Nodularity
Single-Wave (EMAT SH) and
Double-Wave (EMAT SH
Piezo L)
Double-Wave permits
measurement without knowing
the original thickness (Patent
Pending)

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

24

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Properties Measurement Standard Equipment with


temate PowerBox H
Properties
Measurement

Normal Beam (0)


Stress

Bolt Load

Nodularity

temate PowerBox H Kit


(US/EU)

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

Multiplexer

279A0009

279A0009

279A0009

Sensors

274A0157

274A0158

274A0158

Handle

187A0007

187A0007

187A0007

Cable EMAT

232A0169

232A0169

232A0169

Thermocouple

NA

281A0001

281A0001

Tuning Module

NA

PZT 274A0158

PZT 274A0158
035A0020

Wear Surface

NA

035A0020

Add. Software Required

400S0008

400S0009

400S0010

Comments

Dual Coil

Shear & Long. Modes

Shear & Long. Modes

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

25

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Piezoelectric

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

26

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Our specialized piezoelectric transducers are designed for


difficult materials and unique applications
Piezo Sensors & Accessories:
PZT transducers for:
Forgings and castings
Plastics, composites
Highly-attenuative materials
Dry-coupled, flexible, thin-profile
sensors for curved and difficult
to reach areas
Dry-coupled wheel probes

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

27

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

In-Service Applications for


temate PowerBox 1, 2, & 8

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

28

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate PowerBox 1, 2 & 8 provide high-power and


duty cycle for the most demanding applications
temate
PowerBox 1

temate
PowerBox 2

Channels

Bandwidth

50kHz to 6MHz

50kHz to 6MHz

100kHz to 6MHz

RF Pulser

Spike, Toneburst Waveforms


8 kW Power Output
1200Vpp @ 25App into 50
1% Maximum Duty

Magnet Pulser

Receivers

P/R Modes

Spike, Toneburst Waveforms


Spike, Toneburst Waveforms
8 kW Power Output per Channel 2.5-20 kW Power Output per Channel
1200Vpp @ 25App into 50
200Vpp to 2000Vpp @ 40App into 50
1% Max. Duty per Channel
1% Max. Duty per Channel

45A Peak Current


9 kW Peak Power
1% Maximum Duty
50 Input Impedance
-20 dB to 60 dB Gain
0.3 dB Gain Resolution
8 Low Pass RF Filters;
(Off, .1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)
8 High Pass RF Filters;
(Off, .1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)

NA

NA

50 Input Impedance
-20 dB to 60 dB Gain
0.3 dB Gain Resolution
8 Low Pass RF Filters;
(Off, .1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)
8 High Pass RF Filters;
(Off, .1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)

50 Input Impedance
-20 dB to 60 dB Gain
0.3 dB Gain Resolution
8 Low Pass RF Filters;
(Off, .1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)
8 High Pass RF Filters;
(Off, .1, .2, .5, 1, 2, 5, 10 MHz)

Pulse-Echo, Pitch-Catch

Pulse-Echo, Pitch-Catch

Pulse-Echo, Pitch-Catch

A/D Converters

14-bit, 100MHz

14-bit, 100MHz

14-bit, 100MHz

IIR/FIR Digital Filters

IIR/FIR Digital Filters

IIR/FIR Digital Filters

A/B Quadrature or
Clock/Direction

A/B Quadrature or Clock/Direction

12 User Programmable TTL I/O

12 User Programmable TTL I/O

12 User Programmable TTL I/O

100-240VAC, 47-63Hz

100-240VAC, 47-63Hz

100-240VAC, 47-63Hz

Filtering

Encoder Interface A/B Quadrature or Clock/Direction


Alarms & I/O

temate
PowerBox 8

Power Input
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

29

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Corrosion Detection
temate MRUT

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

30

10

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

There are a number of tools designed to inspect for


corrosion, with special emphasis on above-ground
pipelines and storage tanks
Location of
Pipeline/Vessel

Use

Problem

ID Corrosion
SCC
Long Distance
Transportation

Underground

OD Corrosion

Short Distance
Transportation
Process Piping
Oil terminals
Barges
Bridges and
aerial crossings

Above-Ground

Cause

Inspection Tools

Sedimentation

Moisture
entrapment due
to failure of
protective layer

ID Corrosion
SCC

Sedimentation
Erosion or
cracking due to
liquid speed and
pressure

OD Corrosion

Moisture
entrapment
under supports
and in air-to-soil
interfaces
Weather wear

PIG (MFL, UT or
EMAT). Limited to
piggable pipes
LRUT (very limited)

Laser
AUT
LRUT
LFET
MFL
EMAT UT

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

31

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Comparison of the most common inspection alternatives


for corrosion screening
Technique

Effectiveness

Conclusion

Laser

Provides accurate surface measurement of OD erosion


when pipe is exposed

Simple and limited alternative


for visible OD erosion

Automated UT
(AUT)

Users X-Y scanner and normal beam probe/s to provide


very accurate wall thickness measurement
The probe/s need to have direct access to the area of
pipe/tank inspection

Very slow inspection, time


consuming and expensive
Unable to inspect under pipe
supports and air-to-soil
interface
Good technique in smaller
sections with know problems

Long Range
ultrasonic
(LRUT)

Users two rings of transducers to send sound along the


pipe. It can cover up to 50 m from one location
Sensitivity is low (low frequency) and the results are
hard to interpret because of the long distance covered.
It does not need direct access to the area of the pipe
inspected

Provides fast screening of


long stretches of pipe
Range drops dramatically
when the pipe is buried
Difficult to use in areas where
many variables are present
Low sensitivity and difficult
interpretation limit its validity
Used normally when no other
method is possible (e.g.
buried, un-piggable pipes)

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

32

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate MRUT (Medium-Range UT) is designed for


pipeline and tank inspection
Characteristics:
Detects cracks, pits and
corrosion on pipes and tanks
Circumferential scan provides
full volumetric inspection of
pipelines (including under
supports) at fast inspection
speeds (150mm/s)
Axial scan permits inspection of
supports and soil interfaces up
to 1m deep
In tank configuration, the
system scans up to 1m per pass
Custom scanner adapts to all
configurations and can inspect
in any orientation (horizontal,
up, down or sideways)
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

33

11

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Comparison of the most common inspection alternatives


for corrosion screening
Technique

Effectiveness

Conclusion

LFET

Low Frequency Electromagnetic Technique detects


corrosion and wall loss on bare pipe and lightly coated
pipes
Provides better resolution then LRUT and Less than
AUT at fast linear speeds
It required direct access to the area inspected

Effective for pipe inspection of


long stretches of exposed
pipe
Not applicable for under-pipe
supports and air-to soil
interfaces
Relatively difficult to field with
up to 32 sensors for a 10
pipe

temate MRUT

Electro magnetic Acoustic Transducer technique


detects corrosion and wall loss on bare pipe, lightly
coated pipes and tanks.
Material can be ferrous and non-ferrous
Provides better resolution than LRUT and less then
AUT at fast linear speeds
Symmetric and Asymmetric modes provide focus on
different section within the pipe wall as needed
It does not require direct access to the area inspected

Effective for pipe inspection of


long stretches of exposed
pipe
Capable of inspecting under
pipe supports and air to soil
interfaces (1 m into the nonaccessible area)
Uses only 2 sensors with up
to 75m sensor to equipment
distance

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

34

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate MRUT provides two different inspection


types :
Axial Scan
The Sensor travels axially
straddling the OD of the pipe
Transmitter sends Lamb waves
around the pipe in both
directions
The receiver detects the sound,
measuring the amplitude loss
and/or change in time of flight
360 Scan of pipe with speed of
approximately 150mm per
second
Ideal for diameters between 6
(150mm) and 24 (600mm)

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

35

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate MRUT Axial Scan


Corroded walls cause Time-Of-Flight shifts and decreases in amplitude
Time-Of-Flight shifts are caused by velocity changes when traveling
through the thinner portion of the pipe

Amplitude

Decreases in amplitude are caused by energy loss reflected from corroded


areas

Time

Corroded Wall

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

Amplitude

No Corrosion

Time

36

12

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate MRUT provides two different inspection


types :
Circumferential Scan
Used mainly for soil-to-air
interface and under pipe
supports
Scanning performed normally
using S1 Lamb Wave mode
Tandem transmit and receive
sensors travel circumferentially
around the pipe
Sensors configured in pulseecho will detect reflections from
defects along the line
Specially designed sensor send
sound only in one direction
Signal is normalized for autocalibration
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

37

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate MRUT Circumferential Scan


Pitch-catch or pulse-echo method
First signal picked up by the receiver is used for normalization

Amplitude

Reflection form an indication will come later in the time domain

Signal directly from


transmitter used for
normalization

Time

Amplitude

No Corrosion

Reflection from the


indication

Time

Corroded Wall

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

38

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate MRUT is the ideal tool for corrosion detection

Pipelines

Plates (vessels)

Parameters
Axial Scanning

Inspection Speed

Defect Detection

Product Range

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

One hour set up time


Manual jump over welds
15 cm/s up to 75 m/hour

Greater than 20% for


smooth corrosion
Greater than 10% for
perpendicular cracks
1.4% of Cross sectional
Area of 14 pipe
3.3% of cross sectional
area of 4 pipe

From 4 to 24 diameter
with one pass (short and
long path)
Up to 12mm thick with 1mm
coating

Circ. Scanning

Sensor to Sensor

15 cm/s

Up to 22m2/hour

Greater than 30%


smooth corrosion
1 meter long
coverage

Greater than 20% for


smooth corrosion
Greater than 10% for
perpendicular cracks
0.125mm (0.005) surface
defect detection (with
appropriate tuning)

Up to 12 mm
thick with 1 mm
coating

Up to 12 mm thick
Heavier walls are
possible with custom coils
and appropriate tuning

39

13

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate PowerBox H is a manual alternative for


smaller jobs with lower performance requirements
temate MRUT

temate PowerBox H

Instrumentation

PB2 + PBMP ( 25Kgs)


2 Channels (bi and uni-directional)
110-220VAC

PBH ( 4Kgs)
1 Channel (bi-directional)
Battery 4-8 Hours

Sensors

Pulsed and Permanent Magnets

Permanent Magnets

Scanner

Motorized
( 25Kgs + 80Kgs for 75m cables)

Manual ( 2Kgs)

Cable Length

75m

1.80m

Inspection Speed

15 cm/s up to 75 m/hour

2 cm/s

Scanning

Axial

Circumferential

Axial

Circumferential

Modes
Greater than 20%
for smooth
corrosion
Greater than 10%
for perpendicular
Greater than 30%
corrosion
1 Practicalcracks
generation is restrictedsmooth
to EMAT
Sensitivity
1.4% of Cross
1 meter long
2 Very efficient generation with EMAT
sectional Area of
coverage
14 pipe
3.3% of cross
sectional area of 4
pipe
2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

40

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Corrosion Measurement &


Boiler Tube Inspection
temate TG-IS(C), temate TG-IS(B)

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

41

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Comparison of the most common inspection alternatives


for corrosion measurement

Effectiveness
Technique

Conclusion

Wall-Loss
Measurement

Crack Detection

Piezoelectric
UT
(normal beam)

Non-parallel walls and


OD and ID pitting cause
loss of signal. Not
adequate with heavy OD
or ID erosion
Scale prevents
transmission of signal

Back-wall attenuation
technique permits
quantification of problem
once detected with other
methods

Only practical for spot


checking after thorough
surface preparation.
Not adequate when ID pitting
is present

EMAT UT
(normal beam)

Non-parallel walls and


OD and ID pitting cause
loss of signal. Not
adequate with heavy OD
or ID erosion
Capable of inspection on
tubes with adhered scale
with minimum surface
preparation

Back-wall attenuation
technique permits
quantification once
detected with other
methods

Only practical for spot


checking.
Requires minimum surface
preparation
Not adequate when ID pitting
is present

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

42

14

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Comparison of the most common inspection alternatives


for corrosion measurement

Effectiveness
Technique

Wall-Loss
Measurement

Conclusion
Crack Detection

LFET/RFET

Detects pitting but does


not provide wall-loss
measurements
Capable of inspecting
tubes with adhered scale
with minimum surface
preparation

Detects cracks.
Quantification performed
with other methods

Provides scan of tube and


detects most common defects
No differentiation between
cracks and pitting
Lack of thickness
measurement can lead to
false calls

temate
TG-IS(C)

- Provides accurate wall


measurements even in
the presence of ID and
OD pitting
- Capable of inspecting
tubes with adhered scale
with minimum surface
preparation

- Detects cracks.
Quantification performed
with other methods

- Provides scan of tube


- Measures wall loss accurately
in any condition
- Detects cracks separately
from wall loss problems for
proper diagnosis
- Works on carbon steel and
clad tubes

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

43

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate TG-IS(B) is especially designed to detect wall


loss and hydrogen damage in boiler tubes
Characteristics:
Measures wall thickness and
detects HCC and SCC along
the complete tube
Hand-held probe with integrated
encoder for accurate mapping
of tube wall
Light indicators on probe to alert
of wall loss or damage without
looking at the screen
Complete reporting software

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

44

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate TG-IS(B) provides thickness readings by


measuring ultrasonic Time-Of-Flight
Largest signal hump- corresponds to the wave form that is being tracked
Smaller signals include side lobes and secondary wave modes
Thickness is measured by monitoring changes in position of largest hump
that correspond to different lengths of ultrasonic path (Time-Of-Flight)

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

45

15

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Austenitic Weld Inspection


with Phased Array
temate PA-W

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

46

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Austenitic welds are extremely difficult to inspect with


conventional ultrasound
Austenitic Welds:
Austenitic stainless steel is
widely used in nuclear,
petrochemical, and process
industries
Most common combinations
include stainless to stainless
steel, stainless to carbon steel
with inconel butter, and 300
series stainless to inconel
Austenitic welds have a strongly
textured columnar grain
structure that scatter ultrasonic
energy, and skew Shear
Vertical and Longitudinal waves
generated by conventional
piezoelectric systems

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

47

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The temate PA-W permits inspection of austenitic welds


and provides some unique features
Applications:
Indicated for applications that
require SH waves, no couplant
(e.g. high-temperature) or
unique scanning angles
SH Waves:
Do not mode convert in
isotropic materials
Penetrate columnar grains
with minimum attenuation, and
permit inspection of both sides
of the weld from one position
Capable of inspecting up to
200C without active cooling
Permits scanning any angle
from 0 to 90

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

48

16

NDT Solutions for In-Service Inspection

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Thank You
for your attention

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

49

17

EUROPE
ASIA
AMERICAS
Innerspec Technologies, Inc. Innerspec Technologies Europe, S.L. Innerspec Technologies China, LLC.
Avenida Madrid km. 27.2, nave 8
Building #15, 333 Qingtong Rd.
4004 Murray Place
28802 Alcal de Henares, SPAIN
Shanghai, 201203, CHINA
Lynchburg, VA 24501, USA
Tel:
+34-918-776-369
Tel/Fax: +86-(0)21-50177535
Tel: +1-434.948.1301
Fax: +34-911-881-344
www.innerspec.com/cn
Fax: +1-434.948.1313
www.innerspec.com/eu
www.innerspec.com

Thickness Measurement with EMAT


Application Sheet
Rev. AS-TM-E13

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.


All Rights Reserved
This Material May Not Be Published, Rewritten,
or Redistributed Without Express Permission

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet

Table of Contents
1. Introduction & EMAT Technique ................................................................................................................ 3
2. Equipment Options..................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1. Instrumentation ................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2. Sensors .............................................................................................................................................. 3
2.2.1. High-Temperature Normal Beam Sensors (>100C) ................................................................... 4
2.3. Permanent Magnets ........................................................................................................................... 5
2.4. RF Coils .............................................................................................................................................. 6
2.4.1. Wear Surfaces ............................................................................................................................. 6
2.5. Accessories ........................................................................................................................................ 7
2.5.1. Signal Conditioning Box ............................................................................................................... 7
2.5.2. Cables .......................................................................................................................................... 8
2.5.3. Encoders and Thermocouples ..................................................................................................... 8
2.5.4. Sensor Fixtures ............................................................................................................................ 9

3. temate PowerBox H. Configuration, Setup and Operation .................................................................... 10


3.1. Equipment Configuration .................................................................................................................. 10
3.2. Setup Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 11
3.2.1. Setup File Parameters ............................................................................................................... 12
3.3. Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 13
3.3.1. Calibration Using Auto-Correlation (ACF) Algorithm .................................................................. 13
3.3.2. Calibration Using Zero-Crossing Algorithm ................................................................................ 14
3.3.3. High Temperature Measurements ............................................................................................. 16
3.3.4. Line Scans ................................................................................................................................. 17

AS-TM-E13

Page 2 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


1. Introduction & EMAT Technique

EMAT ultrasonic is an ideal method for thickness measurements on conductive materials. The
advantages include:
o Dry, non-contact inspection permits inspection of very hot (up to 1000C) and very cold
materials. Lack of couplant also provides extremely reliable and repeatable inspections with
micrometer accuracy.
o Imperviousness to surface conditions. The materials can be coated, rough or dirty thus
eliminating the need for conditioning the part for measurement.
o Easier probe deployment. Not having wedges or couplant, Snells law of refraction does not
apply, and the angle of the probe does not affect the direction of propagation. This makes them
easier to control and deploy, especially in automated environments.
EMAT sensors can be used in pitch-catch (separate transmitter and receiver) or pulse-echo (same
transmitter and receiver) mode.
The most common wave modes used for thickness measurement are Longitudinal (L) or Shear
Horizontal (SH). SH waves can be very easily generated on both ferromagnetic and non-ferromagnetic
materials whereas L waves are more difficult to generate on ferromagnetic materials. This Application
Sheet covers SH in all materials and L waves on non-ferromagnetic materials.

2. Equipment Options
2.1. Instrumentation
Innerspec offers several portable systems that can be used for thickness measurement.

temate PowerBox H with PowerUT H software. Hand-Held and battery operated for spot
measurements and manual scanning.

temate PowerBox 1, 2 & 8 with PowerUT software. Portable systems used for automated or semiautomated inspections.
For detailed Technical Specifications for each instrument, visit our website or contact Innerspec
Technologies.

The software described in this Application Sheet applies only to the temate PowerBox H instrument.
2.2. Sensors
Our high-temperature sensors integrate magnet, RF Coil and active cooling devices (air or water) as
needed. Separate magnet probes and RF Coils are a versatile and economic alternative to cover multiple
applications with minimum investment. Consult our Catalog of Standard Sensors & Accessories for
detailed Technical Specifications for each Sensor and RF Coil.

AS-TM-E13

Page 3 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


2.2.1.

High-Temperature Normal Beam Sensors (>100C)

All of the High-Temperature Normal Beam Sensors can be used with any of our instruments. Please, refer
to the Catalog of Standard Sensors and Accessories for detailed specifications.
Part
Number

Wave
Mode

EMAT
Type

Maximum
Temperature
and Time

Magnet
Type

Tuning
Module

Connector

SH
274A0125

1,2

274A0126

Linearly
Polarized
Butterfly

Lorentz

SH
Lorentz
Spiral

SH
274A0203

Lorentz
Spiral

274A0165

SH
Lorentz
Spiral

Permanent
Magnet

450C w/air
Unlimited

PE-004

Permanent
Magnet

450C w/air
Unlimited

PE-005
PE-008

Permanent
Magnet

Permanent
Magnet

SH
274A0190

Linearly
Polarized
Butterfly

Lorentz

Permanent
Magnet

80C

<200C
Unlimited
650C
5s
<200C
Unlimited
650C
5s

2-Pin
Lemo 0B

2-Pin
Lemo 0B

PE-005
PE-008

2 Pin
Lemo 0B

2-Pin
Lemo 0B

PE-005
PE-008

PE-002
PE-004
PE-006

2-Pin
Lemo 0B

L
274A0128

Linearly
Polarized
Butterfly

Lorentz

Permanent
Magnet

274A0143

1
2
3
4
5
6

Linearly
Polarized
Butterfly

PE-004
PE-007

2-Pin
Lemo 0B

PE-004
PE-007

2-Pin
Lemo 0B

<200C
Unlimited

L
4,5

450C w/air
Unlimited

Lorentz

Permanent
Magnet

1000C
Unlimited w/air
& water

Dim.
2.5 W x
2.75 H
(64mm x
70mm)
2.5 W x
2.75 H
(64mm x
70mm)
0.98 D
1.97 H
25mm D
50mm H
1.50 W x
3.00 H
(38mm x
76mm)
2.36 W x
3.48 H
(60mm x
88.4mm)
3.75 W x
2.25 H
(95mm x
57mm)
3.25 W x
2.50 H
(83mm x
64mm)

Applications,
Range and
3
Accuracy
Thickness
Gage
Flaw Detection
Range:
1-100mm
Thickness
Gage
Flaw Detection
Range:
1-100mm
Thickness
Gage
Flaw Detection
Range:
1-50mm
Thickness
Gage
Flaw Detection
Range:
1-50mm
Thickness
Gage
Flaw Detection
Range:
1-100mm
Thickness
Gage
Range:
1-500mm

Thickness
Gage
Range:
1-100mm

Sensor 274A0125 has a linearly polarized coil for maximum accuracy on thin and anisotropic materials. Different readings
are obtained depending on the orientation of the sensor and the rolling direction (also valid for measuring anisotropy).
When used with Signal Conditioning Box PE-001 tuning module must be used
L-Wave Sensors 274A0128 and 274A0143 are only valid for non-ferromagnetic materials (or ferromagnetic above Curie
point). All SH probes are valid for magnetic or non-magnetic materials.
Typical values for aluminum, carbon steel and other conductive materials. Two back walls or more are required for
maximum accuracy.
When used with Signal Conditioning Box NB2-1500 kHz tuning module must be used

Tuning module PE-005 is not necessary when connecting directly to temate PowerBox H without signal conditioning.

AS-TM-E13

Page 4 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


2.3. Permanent Magnets
Separate Magnets and RF Coils permit easy replacement of RF Coils. The magnets below are rated for a
maximum temperature of 80C except for the 274A0244 and 272A0144, which are rated to 200C. In order
to select the appropriate Magnet and RF Coil, please note:

Larger Magnets provide greater signal-to-noise but can be unwieldy and difficult to move on
ferromagnetic parts.
As with piezoelectric transducers, larger RF Coils concentrate the energy deeper into the material so
they have worse near-field sensitivity. Each RF Coil is provided with 3dB plots relative to their point of
maximum sensitivity.
Butterfly Coils provide a linearly polarized wave that is very effective for coverage and sensitivity in flaw
detection but will provide different velocity (and thickness) readings on anisotropic materials depending
on the orientation of the probe.
Spiral Coils are less affected by anisotropy thus they are easier to use for thickness measurement in
anisotropic materials. Flaw detection is limited by their design.
Permanent Magnet L-Wave coils are only appropriate for non-magnetic materials. Consult Innerspec
Technologies for L-Wave generation in ferromagnetic materials.

Part Number

Magnet Type

274A0244
Large L

Permanent
High-Temp
200C Magnet

(Replaces
274A0107 &
274A0144)

274A0106
Medium - M

274A0107
Large L
(Discontinued)
274A0144
Large L
(Discontinued)

Magnetic
Field

Dimensions

Normal

temate
PowerBox H
PowerBox 1
PowerBox 2

Normal

temate
PowerBox H
PowerBox 1
PowerBox 2
PowerBox 8

Normal

temate
PowerBox H
PowerBox 1
PowerBox 2
PowerBox 8

Tangential

temate
PowerBox H
PowerBox 1
PowerBox 2
PowerBox 8

Integrated
Wheel Kit &
Encoder

Permanent
0.5 x 0.5
12.7 mm x 12.7
mm
face

Permanent
1 x 1
25.4 mm x 25.4
mm
face
Permanent
1 x 1
25.4 mm x 25.4
mm
face
Temp 200C

Applicable
Instrument

Other

Supports all
connectorless RF
Coils.

Optional
Roller Kits
for scanning

Optional
Roller Kits
and Encoder
for scanning

274A0124
L-Wave
LW

AS-TM-E13

Permanent
L-Wave

Page 5 of 21

Optional
Roller Kits
and Encoder
for scanning

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet

Part Number

Magnet Type

Magnetic
Field

Applicable
Instrument

Dimensions

160A0046
TG-IS

Permanent

temate
PowerBox 1
PowerBox 2
PowerBox 8

Normal

Other

Built-in
Rollers,
Encoder and
Alarm LEDs
(used for
thickness
mapping)

2.4. RF Coils
RF Coils. See Catalog of Sensors & Accessories for beam profiles and other details for each RF Coil.
Connectorless (-CL) versions of each coil are available for use with the 274A0244 magnet.
Part Number

Compatible
Probe

Geometry

OD

ID

Width

Length

PE-M-S-0.730-0.250

274A0106

Spiral

0.730 in
18.54 mm

0.250 in
6.35 mm

PE-L-S-0.730-0.250 (-CL)

274A0244
274A0107
274A0144

Spiral

0.730 in
18.54 mm

0.250 in
6.35 mm

PE-007 2800kHz
PE-009 1660kHz

PE-S1-0.350-0.639

160A0046

Butterfly

0.350 in
8.90 mm

0.639 in
16.23 mm

PE-006 3040kHz
PE-009 1410kHz

Butterfly

0.726 in
18.44 mm

0.492 in
12.50 mm

PE-006 3280kHz
PE-009 1570kHz

Butterfly

1.218 in
30.94 mm

0.950 in
24.13 mm

PE-006 3330kHz
PE-009 1550kHz

Butterfly

0.986 in
25.04 mm

1.254 in
31.85 mm

PE-006 2776kHz
PE-009 1545kHz

PE-L-B-0.726-0.492 (-CL)
PE-L-B-1.208-0.942 (-CL)
PE-LW-B-1.118-1.254

274A0244
274A0107
274A0144
274A0244
274A0107
274A0144
274A0128

Optional Tuning
(Frequency)
PE-007 2800kHz
PE-009 1660kHz

2.4.1. Wear Surfaces


Standard RF coil wear surfaces protect the RF coil against abrasion and puncture. The wear surfaces
should be replaced if they are torn, worn out or wrinkled to avoid damage to the RF coil. For optimum
performance use only the wear surface suggested in this Application Sheet.
Part Number

Application

Dimensions & Length

510V0005

Normal Beam up to 200C

High Resistance Wear Surface Tape Roll


0.010" Thick 2 x 5 yds

510V0006

All Wave Modes up to 200C

High Resistance Wear Surface Tape Roll


0.005" Thick 2 x 5 yds

AS-TM-E13

Page 6 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


2.5. Accessories
2.5.1. Signal Conditioning Box

Required for temate PowerBox 1, 2 and 8. They provide impedance matching, filtering, and a first stage
of amplification between the RF Coil and the Instrument.

Although the temate PowerBox H does not need them, they can be used to locate at long distances from
the instrumentation (up to 100m).
When the equipment is used with Signal Conditioning Box for normal beam thickness application an
appropriate tuning module should be selected based on optional tuning frequency listed in the RF Coil table
above.
Part
Number

Type &
Frequency

Magnets &
Sensors

Minimum
Cables
Required*

Connector
Instrument

Connector
RF Coil

245A0136

1 Channel
Pulse-Echo
Normal
Beam
2-4MHz

All
Normal
Beam
except
160A0046

1-232A0294
1-232A0234
1-232A0296
1-232A0123
1-232A0580

1-BNC
1-Triax
1-2 Pin
Lemo 1B

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

245A0142

1 Channel
Pulse-Echo
Normal Beam
1-2MHz

All
Normal
Beam
except
160A0046

1-232A0294
1-232A0234
1-232A0296
1-232A0123
1-232A0580

1-BNC
1-Triax
1-2 Pin
Lemo 1B

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

245A0222

1 Channel
Pulse-Echo &
Pitch-Catch
All Wave
Modes
& 1:8
Multiplexer
Pulse-Echo
(includes 1
slot for Tuning
Module)

245A0132

2 Channel
Pitch-Catch
PulseEchoAngled
Beam &
Guided
Waves
(includes 2
slots for
Tuning
Modules)

AS-TM-E13

274A0244
274A0106
274A0120
274A0108
160A0062
160A0049
160A0076
160A0119
274A0107
274A0144

274A0244
274A0106
274A0120
274A0108
160A0062
160A0049
160A0076
160A0119
274A0107
274A0144

1 Channel
1-232A0294
1-232A0234
1-232A0296
2-232A0123
1-232A0580

1 Channel
1-232A0294
1-232A0234
1-232A0296
2-232A0123
1-232A0411
1-232A0411
2 Channel
1-232A0294
2-232A0234
2-232A0296
4-232A0123
1-232A0580

1-BNC
1-Triax
1-2 Pin Lemo
1B (power)

2-BNC
2-Triax
2-6 Pin Lemo
1B
1-2 Pin Lemo
1B (power)

Page 7 of 21

2-2 Pin
Lemo 0B
1-6 Pin
Lemo 1B
1-16 Pin
Lemo 3B

Dimensions

3.42 x 5.15 x 1.86


87mm x 131mm x 47mm
Mounting Holes
1.57 x 5.39 (40mm x 137mm)

4.25 x 6.77 x 2.50


108mm x 172mm x 64mm
Mounting Holes
2.36 x 7.18 (60mm x 182mm)

4-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

Box
4.25 x 6.77 x 2.50
108mm x 172mm x 64mm
Mounting Holes
2.36 x 7.18 (60mm x 182mm)

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


2.5.2.

Cables

Necessary to connect the Sensors and RF Coils to the Signal Conditioning Box and Instruments.

Part Number

Length

Connector
Instrument

Connector
Signal
Cond. Box

Connector
Probe

Instrument

Description

232A0123

6
(182cm)

NA

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

All

1 Channel (2 Pin) RF Coil


Cable

232A0234

6
(182cm)

1-Triax

1-Triax

NA

PowerBox 1,
2

1 Channel Transmit Cable for


PowerBox 1 & 2

232A0296

6
(182cm)

1-BNC

1-BNC

NA

PowerBox 1,
2

1 Channel Receive Cable for


PowerBox 1 & 2

232A0294

6
(182cm)

1-DB25

1-2 Pin
Lemo 1B

NA

PowerBox 1,
2

Signal Conditioning Box


Power Cable

232A0308

6
(182cm)

1-DB9

NA

1-8 Pin
M12

PowerBox 1,
2

PowerBox 1, 2 & 8 Encoder


Cable

232A0580

6
(182cm)

NA

1-2 Pin
Lemo

1-6 Pin Lemo

All

2 Channel (6 Pin) RF Coil


Cable

2.5.3. Encoders and Thermocouples


Designed to be integrated seamlessly with our instruments.
Part
Number

Description

Connector

Probes

Instrument

281A0002

Encoder
Cable Length: 2m
Resolution: 4p/mm -100ppi

Lemo
FGG.2B.319.CLAD62Z

274A0107
274A0144
274A0121

temate
PowerBox H

281A0001

Thermocouple

Type K Mini

NA

temate
PowerBox H

Picture

AS-TM-E13

Page 8 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


2.5.4. Sensor Fixtures
Roller-Kit assemblies are recommended for scanning ferromagnetic parts with Permanent Magnet Probes,
and handles are used for spot checking through insulation inspection holes with our high-temperature
sensors.
Part
Number

Description

Magnets

187A0001

4-Wheel Roller Kit for Permanent Magnet Magnets

274A0106
274A0107
274A0144
274A0120
274A0121
274A0108
274A0124

187A0003

Front-Rear and Side Roller Kit for Large Permanent


Magnets
(used for axial and circumferential scanning of tubes
and rounds)

274A0107
274A0144
274A0120
274A0121

187A0004

Front-Rear and Side Roller Kit for XL and LW


Permanent Magnets
(used for axial and circumferential scanning of tubes
and rounds)

274A0108
274A0124

187A0011

Skid with Air Knife for High Temperature Sensor


For continuous inspection at 650C
1.50 (38.1mm)H x 2.50 (63.5mm)W x 2.63 (66.8mm)L
Anchor: 2 ea. M6 hole, 1 ea. per side

274A0165

187A0007

High-Temperature Sensor Handle


1 D x 12 L
25mm D x 300mm L

274A0145
274A0146

AS-TM-E13

Page 9 of 21

Picture

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet

3. temate PowerBox H. Configuration, Setup and Operation


3.1. Equipment Configuration

temate PowerBox H with Sensor

Complete Sensor

Magnet with RF Coil

Permanent Magnet Probes Can Create Very Powerful Magnetic Fields


Handle With Care

AS-TM-E13

Page 10 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


3.2. Setup Guide
Sensors and RF Coils Options for Thickness Measurement. Connectorless coil options are available for use
with 274A0244.

Sensor Options

RF Coil Options

274A0244
274A0125
274A0126
274A0145
274A0146
1
274A0128
1
274A0143
274A0107
247A0144

PE-M-S-0.730-0.250
PE-L-S-0.730-0250 (-CL)
PE-L-S-0.730-0.250 (-CL)
PE-L-B-0.726-0.492 (-CL)
PE-L-B-0.726-0.492 (-CL)
PE-L-B-1.208-0.942 (-CL)
PE-L-B-1.208-0.942 (-CL)
1
PE-LW-B-0.986-1.254
PE-S1-0.350-0.639

Standard Setup Files:

Material

Thickness

Standard Setup File

1-50mm

TM_HC_SH_1_50mm
1
TM_HC_LW_1_50mm

50-125mm

TM_HC_SH_50_125mm
1
TM_HC_LW_50_125mm

1-50mm

TM_MC_SH_1_50mm
1
TM_MC_LW_1_50mm

50-125mm

TM_MC_SH_50_125mm
1
TM_MC_LW_50_125mm

1-50mm

TM_PC_SH_1_50mm
1
TM_PC_LW_1_50mm

50-125mm

TM_PC_SH_50_125mm
1
TM_PC_LW_50_125mm

Highly Conductive (20%


IACS or higher)
Aluminum, Copper,
Nickel, Zinc

Medium Conductivity
(20% to 10% IACS)
Most Carbon Steel

Poor Conductivity
(Less than 10% IACS)
Stainless Steel, Bronze,
Titanium

1.
2.

Only valid for non-ferromagnetic materials (Generates Longitudinal Wave Mode).


Valid for both ferromagnetic and non-ferromagnetic materials (Generates Shear Horizontal Wave Mode).

AS-TM-E13

Page 11 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


3.2.1.

Setup File Parameters

Setup File

TM_HC_SH_1_50mm

TM_HC_LW_1_50mm

TM_HC_SH_50_125mm

TM-HC_LW_50_125mm

TM_MC_SH_1_50mm

TM_MC_LW_1_50mm

TM_MC_SH_50_125mm

TM_MC_LW_50_125mm

TM_PC_SH_1_50mm

TM_PC_LW_1_50mm

TM_PC_SH_50_125mm

TM_PC_LW_50_125mm

Frequency and Timing

Signal Conditioning

Frequency 3000 kHz


Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 80 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 60 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 80 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 50 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 80 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 60 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 80 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 50 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 80 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 80 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 80 sec
Frequency 3000 kHz
Tone Bursts 1 Cycles
Data Window 100 sec
Gate 2 Start / Range 15 / 80 sec

Gain 60 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 60 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 60 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 60 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 60 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 60 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 60 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 60 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 66 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 66 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 69 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz
Gain 69 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
FIR Filter 1 to 5 MHz

TOF Calculation

Autocorrelation
ACF

Autocorrelation
ACF

Zero-Crossing

Zero-Crossing

Autocorrelation
ACF
Autocorrelation
ACF

Zero-Crossing

Zero-Crossing

Autocorrelation
ACF
Autocorrelation
ACF

Zero-Crossing

Zero-Crossing

These parameters are included in the pre-configured standard Setup Files. These configurations can be
modified to optimize the results on different applications. The types of modifications include:

Increase averaging to improve signal to noise


Increase Coincidence to improve signal to noise
Increase number of cycles to penetrate thick and attenuating materials
Decrease number of cycles for better axial resolution in thin materials
Adjust Gain to amplify the signal on display screen.
Re-Calibrate to offset minor changes in ultrasonic velocity due to material variations.

Look the temate PowerBox H Manual for details on the operation of the equipment.
AS-TM-E13

Page 12 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


3.3. Operation

Connect Sensor and thermocouple if needed.

Power on temate PowerBox H.


Select OPEN to load the standard Setup File for your application (see Setup Guide).

3.3.1. Calibration Using Auto-Correlation Function (ACF) Algorithm


The Auto-Correlation Function algorithm provides peak to peak measurements and it is the simplest
solution to measure thickness with high accuracy. This algorithm requires that at least two back walls
present in the A-scan. If more then two backwalls are selected, the amplitude of each consecutive backwall
signal should be less then the previous one. If the material is too thick or attenuative and only one back wall
is present, use Zero Crossing Algorithm.

Use a piece of known thickness of the same material to determine the velocity of sound and calibrate
the instrument. Using a different material or the wrong thickness measurements will reduce the
accuracy of the measurement.
Select the calibration block of known thickness and place the probe gently on the calibration block.
Press Gate and select Gate2 (Flaw).
Setup Gate2 Start and Range to ensure that Gate2 width covers at least two back-walls from the
material. The gate values on the pre-loaded setup files are already preset for the material and
thickness of the material, but small changes might be required.
Press Gate and select Gate2 (Flaw). Ensure Gate2 Start (s) and Range (s) are correct according to
the Setup File loaded for your application (Setup File Parameters).
Select Gate 2 Menu. Ensure Mode/Algo is Auto-correlation (ACF) and Min Thickness is at least
1.5mm. The ACF algorithm will not work if min thickness is below 1.5mm. Select Close and exit this
menu.
Press CAL button. The Velocity Calibration menu will open at the bottom of the screen.

AS-TM-E13

Page 13 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet

Connect Thermocouple to the device.


Ensure that the device is calibrated to read correct Temperature values. (see: User Manual)
Check Temperature Ref. The temperature field will read the temperature measured with the thermocouple. This field can also be edited manually in the absence of a thermocouple.
Press Lock to freeze the reference temperature value.
Navigate to Depth 1 and edit the value for the thickness as per the calibration block using
alphanumeric pad and/or thumbwheel.
Press Check button, navigate to Add using thumbwheel and press check again.
The pulser will momentarily pulse and display the Depth and TOF (s) values in the Velocity Calibration
menu.
The velocity in the material will be calculated automatically (sensor offset will not change). Both values
will be displayed in the CAL menu.
For ACF only one depth is necessary. Adding a second depth value will invalidate the measurement.
Select OK and press Check or Exit to leave the calibration menu.
Press the Start/Stop button to start taking measurements.
Auto-correlation algorithm requires inserting a minimum thickness value. By default the system is set to
1.5mm. Increasing the number of cycles to improve penetration depth might require increasing this
minimum thickness value.

3.3.2. Calibration Using Zero-Crossing Algorithm


Zero-crossing algorithm is normally used when only one back-wall is present. The algorithm measures the
distance from the start of the pulse to a specific point of the waveform. To improve accuracy, the point of
measurement is the intersection with the zero (X axis) of one of the features of the waveform (either the
peak of the waveform or a point in the waveform that crosses the threshold), thus the name zero-crossing
algorithm. For zero-crossing calibration it is required to insert at least two calibration points for velocity and
sensor offset calculations.

A calibration Step Block is needed with at least two different thickness values.
Place the probe gently on the lower step of the calibration block.
Navigate to the DAQ Tab and edit the velocity of the wave mode in the material to an approximate
value.
Press Gate and select Gate2 (Flaw).
Setup Gate2 Start and Range to ensure that Gate2 width covers the first back-wall for the range of
thicknesses to be measured. The gate values on the pre-loaded setup files are already preset for the
material and thickness of the material, but small changes might be required.
Press Gate and select Gate2 (Flaw). Ensure Gate2 Start (s) and Range (s) are correct according to
the Setup File loaded for your application. (Setup File Parameters)
Select Gate 2 Menu. Ensure Mode/Algo is Zero-Crossing and First Peak after Threshold is
disabled.

AS-TM-E13

Page 14 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet

In most situations, using Zero-Crossing without enabling First Peak after Threshold is sufficient to
provide accurate readings.
First Peak after Threshold enabled should be used when two peaks of similar amplitude (from the
same or different back walls) are present in the gate and the TOF values shift from peak to peak. By
enabling First Peak after Threshold and setting a Gate2 threshold, the user can force the algorithm to
always pick up the first peak which crosses the threshold value. Experienced users can achieve very
accurate thickness readings even in situations with very poor signal to noise.
Press CAL button. The Velocity Calibration menu will open at the bottom of the screen.
Connect Thermocouple to the device.
Ensure that the device is calibrated to read correct Temperature values. (see: User Manual)
Check Temperature Ref. The temperature field will read the temperature measured with the thermocouple. This field can also be edited manually in the absence of a thermocouple.
Press Lock to freeze the reference temperature value.
Navigate to Depth 1 and edit the value for the thickness as per the calibration block using
alphanumeric pad and/or thumbwheel.
Press Check button, navigate to Add using thumbwheel and press check again.
The pulser will momentarily pulse and display the Depth and TOF (s) values in the Velocity Calibration
menu.
Place sensor on the second step of the calibration block.
Navigate to Depth 2 and edit the thickness value as per the second step of calibration block using
alphanumeric pad or thumbwheel.
Press Check button, navigate to Add using thumbwheel and press check again.
The pulser will momentarily pulse and display the Depth and TOF (s) values in the Velocity Calibration
menu.
The system will automatically calculate the Probe Offset and Calibrated velocity in the material
Do not Add a thickness value twice or it will invalidate the calibration.
Select OK and press Check or Exit to leave the calibration menu.
Press the Start/Stop button to start taking measurements.

AS-TM-E13

Page 15 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


3.3.3. High Temperature Measurements

Changes in temperature affect the velocity of sound, which need to be taken into account for accurate
thickness and TOF measurements:

The Temperature correction can be performed on DAQ tab by enabling Temp Correction.
Once enabled, the temperature measured by the thermocouple will be displayed in real time. This field
can also be edited manually.
Press Lock to lock the temperature value read by thermocouple.
The corrected velocity will also be locked and displayed in Measured Velocity field.
Apply transducer to the hot part and perform inspection. This inspection will be performed using the
temperature corrected velocity.

Note:
Do not enable Temp correction if you are not interested in temperature corrections.
If temperature correction is used, perform the calibration using enabling the Temperature Ref field.
Only high temperature transducers supplied by Innerspec Technologies should be used for high
temperature measurements. (Refer to the product Catalog).
To avoid damage to the sensors, keep the sensor within its rating and specifications.

AS-TM-E13

Page 16 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


3.3.4. Line Scans

Connect Encoders (PN 281A0002) to instrument if not already integrated into magnet.
Place probe with encoder on the part to be inspected.
Select View to display A-Scan and Strip Chart. (A-scan (50%) + Strip (50%))
In DSP/GATES menu, select First Strip Curve to display Gate2 Thick and second strip chart to display
None. The dual strip chart user has several options to display thickness, amplitude and TOF using
Gate 1, 2 and 3.
Select DAQ tab and check Trigger Source to Encoder.
Select Axis1(X/Scan) and edit Start to 0, Stop to 500 and Pitch to 12 units (assuming the units
selected are mm). Encoder PN 281A0002 provides a pulse or tick every 0.25 mm, therefore a pitch of
12 implies that each sample will be taken at 3mm intervals.
The pitch of the encoder defines the distance between 2 samples or triggers generated by the external
encoder. The user is free to select any desired pitch suitable for the application.

3.3.4.1. Encoder Calibration

Press 0 besides Set button and Edit ENCODERS Position to any value (e.g. 200 mm) and start
inspection. Pulsing will start as soon as the encoder starts moving. Confirm that the X-position display
in the status bar is 0.
Move the encoder by the value chosen (e.g. 200 mm) and press Set. The reading below Set should
display approximately 0.25 mm/tick. It should not be a zero value. If value is zero repeat the calibration
process.
Stop pulsing. The encoder is calibrated and is ready to scan.

3.3.4.2. Scanning with Encoder

Start pulsing and wait for X-position display to go to 0.


Move the probe and encoder. The A-scan or strip chart should update as the encoder moves forward.
On strip chart mode, moving forward will update new values, reversing the direction will repaint the
trace backwards. This feature is interesting if during scan a part of the sample wasnt read correctly, or
to confirm response from a certain area. Press stop when finished.
Every time user stops pulsing and restarts, the x-scan will be reset to 0 and will be treated as a new
scan.

AS-TM-E13

Page 17 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


3.4. Troubleshooting
3.4.1. Using Auto-Correlation Function the thickness is double the actual value
The EMAT sensors generally use shear waves for thickness measurements. In materials with measureable
anisotropy sometime we see the amplitude level of back-walls is not strictly a decreasing function. The
shear velocity differences in one polarization versus other may cause the second back-wall signal to be
lesser than first and third back-wall. If these three peaks are selected for auto-correlation, the algorithms
jumps to the highest peak in the third back-wall causing erroneous thickness reading and would be double
of the actual thickness.

AS-TM-E13

Page 18 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


Solution
This problem can be address in two ways
1. Gating only Two Back-Wall Signals
nd

st

rd

This situation where 2 back-wall is less than the 1 and 3 back-walls causing erroneous thickness
measurement as shown above can be avoided by ensuring that gate is placed only first two back-wall
signals in the A-scan.

AS-TM-E13

Page 19 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet

2. Adjusting Position of Gate in A-scan


nd

st

rd

Another method to avoid the situation where 2 back-wall is less than the 1 and 3 back-wall is, to move
nd
rd
th
nd
the gate location to cover the 2 , 3 and 4 back-wall signals. If the gate is positioned in a Scan so the 2
rd
back-wall is lover then the 3 back-wall, the algorithm will still find the next highest peak correctly as shown
below.

AS-TM-E13

Page 20 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Thickness Measurement with EMAT Application Sheet


3.4.2. Wrong thickness reading on materials thinner then 1.5 mm (0.06)
By default the minimum thickness value under Gate 2 menu is set to 1.5mm (0.06). Minimum thickness
value is necessary for the software to differentiate between two peaks within the same back-wall signal
versus two highest peaks relating to two distinct consecutive back-wall signals. The purpose of minimum
thickness parameter is to avoid searching next highest peak within the spread of the first back-wall signal
as shown in the figure below. This parameter is directly related to the spread or width of the backwall
signals, which is highly dependent on the number of cycles, frequency of excitation and probe lift-off.

AS-TM-E13

Page 21 of 21

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

EUROPE
ASIA
AMERICAS
Innerspec Technologies, Inc. Innerspec Technologies Europe, S.L. Innerspec Technologies China, LLC.
Avenida Madrid km. 27.2, nave 8
Building #15, 333 Qingtong Rd.
4004 Murray Place
28802 Alcal de Henares, SPAIN
Shanghai, 201203, CHINA
Lynchburg, VA 24501, USA
Tel:
+34-918-776-369
Tel/Fax: +86-(0)21-50177535
Tel: +1-434.948.1301
Fax: +34-911-881-344
www.innerspec.com/cn
Fax: +1-434.948.1313
www.innerspec.com/eu
www.innerspec.com

Surface Waves with EMAT


Application Sheet
Rev. AS-SW-D13

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.


All Rights Reserved
This Material May Not Be Published, Rewritten,
or Redistributed Without Express Permission

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet

Table of Contents
1. Surface Waves or Rayleigh Waves............................................................................................................ 3
2. Equipment Options..................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1. Instrumentation ................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2. Sensors & Accessories ....................................................................................................................... 4
2.3. Permanent Magnet Probe + RF Coil Options ..................................................................................... 5
2.4. RF Coils .............................................................................................................................................. 6
2.4.1. Wear Surfaces ............................................................................................................................. 6
2.5. Accessories ........................................................................................................................................ 7
2.5.1. Signal Conditioning Box ............................................................................................................... 7
2.5.2. Cables .......................................................................................................................................... 8
2.5.3. Encoder ........................................................................................................................................ 8
2.5.4. Sensor Fixtures ............................................................................................................................ 9

3. temate PowerBox H. Configuration, Setup and Operation .................................................................... 10


3.1. Equipment Configuration .................................................................................................................. 10
3.2. Setup Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 11
3.2.1. Rayleigh Waves on Carbon Steel and Aluminum ...................................................................... 11
3.2.2. Rayleigh Waves on Other Materials........................................................................................... 11
3.2.3. Setup File Parameters ............................................................................................................... 12
3.3. Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 14
3.3.1. Inspection Procedure ................................................................................................................. 14
3.3.2. Pitch-Catch Configuration .......................................................................................................... 14
3.3.3. Alarms and Threshold Setting .................................................................................................... 16
3.3.4. Pulse-Echo Configuration .......................................................................................................... 17
3.3.5. Line Scans ................................................................................................................................. 18

AS-SW-D13

Page 2 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


1. Surface Waves or Rayleigh Waves
Introduction
Rayleigh waves or Surface waves are the simplest case of guided
waves. They are confined to within a wavelength of the surface
along the direction of propagation. Surface waves combine both a
longitudinal and transverse motion to create an elliptic orbit motion.
Rayleigh waves are useful because they are very sensitive to
surface defects (and other surface features) and they follow the
surface around curves. Because of this, Rayleigh waves can be
used to inspect areas that other waves might have difficulty
reaching. Rayleigh waves can be very easily generated on both
ferromagnetic and non-ferromagnetic materials This Application
Sheet covers Rayleigh waves for various depth of penetration as
required by the application using the setups in pulse-echo or
pitch-catch configurations.
Characteristics
Depth of Penetration: The Rayleigh wave depth of penetration is
directly related to the wavelength (pitch of the EMAT coil) and
the frequency, with 97% of energy concentrated within a single
wavelength depth from the top wall. Limited for surface flaw
detection.
Velocity of Propagation: Rayleigh wave mode travels at a
velocity approximately 92 % of a shear wave velocity.
Direction of Propagation: Parallel to the entry wall.
Sensor Configuration: Pulse-echo or Pitch-catch.
Wave mode: Rayleigh waves in frequencies ranging from
200KHz to 4.5MHz.
Materials Inspected: Ferromagnetic and non-ferromagnetic
metals.
Applications
Surface inspection in plates (>0.025 or >0.5mm).
Surface Flaw detection in plates, tubes and rods.
EMAT Uniqueness
Dry and non-contact (up to 2.5mm lift-off depending on frequency and type of application). Ideal for
automated environments.
Ability to normalize the signal for automatic and continuous self-calibration.
Less sensitive to probe positioning. Especially well-suited for automated inspection.
2. Equipment Options
2.1. Instrumentation
Innerspec offers several portable systems that can be used for surface wave measurements.

temate PowerBox H with PowerUT H software. Hand-Held and battery operated for spot
measurements and manual scanning.

temate PowerBox 1, 2 & 8 with PowerUT software. Portable systems used for automated or semiautomated inspections.
For detailed Technical Specifications for each instrument, visit our website or contact Innerspec
Technologies.

AS-SW-D13

Page 3 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet

The software described in this Application Sheet applies only to the temate PowerBox H instrument.
2.2. Sensors
Innerspec offers Rayleigh wave sensors with permanent magnet and electromagnet sensors for a wide
variety of applications and environments. The permanent magnet probes can be used on both
ferromagnetic and non-ferromagnetic materials generating Rayleigh waves using Lorentz force
mechanism. Pulsed electromagnets on the other hand rely on Magnetostriction and can only be used on
ferromagnetic materials. Pulsed electromagnets permit scanning without attracting the part and can
increase signal to noise ratio in some circumstances but require the use of a separate magnet pulser. This
application sheet refers only to permanent magnets. Consult Innerspec for information on applications with
electromagnets.
2.2.1.

High-Temperature Sensor (1000C)

Our high temperature sensors integrate magnet, RF Coil and active cooling devices (air or water) as
needed.

Part Number

280F0141/2
(Ultra-High
Temperature
Surface/Lamb)

AS-SW-D13

Wave Mode

Rayleigh
Lamb
Pulse/Echo
Pitch/Catch

Magnet
Type

Permanent
Magnet

Maximum
Temp.

200C
Unlimited
850C
Air Cooled

Page 4 of 18

Connector

2 Pin Lemo
0B

Dimension

3.25 x
3.00 x
2.75
82.6 x 76.2
x 69.8mm

Applications

Surface Wave
Inspections at Very
High Temperatures

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


2.3. Permanent Magnet Probe + RF Coil Options
Separate permanent magnet probes and RF Coils (Sensor = Probe + RF Coil) are a versatile and economic
alternative to have solutions for multiple applications with the minimum investment.

Part Number

Magnet Type

Magnetic
Field

Dimensions

Applicable
Instrument

Other

temate
PowerBox H
274A0244
Large L
(Replaces
274A0107 &
274A0144

Permanent
High-Temp
200C Magnet

temate
PowerBox 1
Normal

Integrated
Wheel Kit &
Encoder

temate
PowerBox 2

Supports all
connectorless RF
Coils.

temate
PowerBox 82

274A0107
Large L

temate
PowerBox H

Permanent
1 x 1 face

(Discontinued)

temate
PowerBox 1

Normal

274A0144
Large L
(Discontinued)

AS-SW-D13

temate
PowerBox 2
Permanent
1 x 1 face
Temp 200C

Optional
Roller Kits
and Encoder
for scanning

temate
PowerBox 82

Page 5 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


2.4. RF Coils
See Catalog of Sensors & Accessories for bandwidth and other details for each RF Coil.
Depth
mm

Coil Part Number

Function

Coil
Period
in

Coil
Period
mm

Freq
MHz

Tuning
Module

0.5

T-L-MF-0.024x15-0.715-5.000R
R-L-MF-0.024x15-0.680-1.600R

Transmitter
Receiver

0.024

0.6

4.792

L/SE-PC-MF-0.024-5000kHz
PE-006

1.0

T-L-MF-0.032x12-0.715-5.000R
R-L-MF-0.032x12-0.680-1.600R

Transmitter
Receiver

0.032

0.8

3.594

L/SE-PC-MF-0.032-3500kHz
PE-007

1.5

T-L-M-0.060x12-1.000
R-L-M-0.060x12-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.060

1.5

1.917

L/SE-PC-M-0.060-2000kHz
PE-008

2.0

T-L-M-0.080x8-1.000
R-L-M-0.080x8-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.080

2.0

1.438

L/SE-PC-M-0.080-1500kHz
PE-010

2.5

T-L-M-0.100x7-1.000
R-L-M-0.100x7-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.100

2.5

1.150

L/SE-PC-M-0.100-1250kHz
PE-010

3.0

T-L-M-0.120x5-1.000
R-L-M-0.120x5-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.120

3.0

0.958

L/SE-PC-M-0.120-1000kHz
PE-011

3.5

T-L-M-0.140x6-1.000
R-L-M-0.140x6-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.140

3.6

0.821

L/SE-PC-M-0.140-900kHz
PE-010

4.0

T-L-M-0.160x5-1.000
R-L-M-0.160x5-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.160

4.1

0.719

L/SE-PC-M-0.160-750kHz
PE-011

4.5

T-L-M-0.180x5-1.000
R-L-M-0.180x5-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.180

4.6

0.639

L/SE-PC-M-0.180-700kHz
PE-011

5.0

T-L-M-0.200x4-1.000
R-L-M-0.200x4-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.200

5.1

0.575

L/SE-PC-M-0.200-500kHz
PE-011

6.5

T-L-M-0.250x4-1.000
R-L-M-0.250x4-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.250

6.4

0.460

L/SE-PC-M-0.250-400kHz
PE-012-LF

7.5

T-L-M-0.300x3-1.000
R-L-M-0.300x3-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.300

7.6

0.383

L/SE-PC-M-0.300-300kHz
PE-012-LF

10.0

T-L-M-0.400x2-1.000
R-L-M-0.400x2-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.400

10.2

0.288

L/SE-PC-M-0.400-200kHz
PE-013-LF

12.0

T-L-M-0.500x2-1.000
R-L-M-0.500x2-1.000

Transmitter
Receiver

0.500

12.7

0.230

L/SE-PC-M-0.500-200kHz
PE-013-LF

NOTE:
1.
2.

For Pitch-Catch Configuration, both Transmitter and Receiver coils are used along with tuning
module part number starting with L/SE-PC-.
For Pulse-Echo Configuration, only Receiver coil is used to function both as transmitter and
receiver along with tuning module part number starting with L/SE-PE-.

2.4.1. Wear Surfaces


Standard RF coil wear surfaces protect the RF coil against abrasion and puncture. The wear surfaces
should be replaced if they are torn, worn out or wrinkled to avoid damage to the RF coil. For optimum
performance use only the wear surface suggested in this Application Sheet.
Wear surface 510V0006 is the recommended option for most applications. Thicker wear surface
(510V0005) should only be used on larger wavelengths (0.200 and greater) and rough materials.

Part Number

Application

Dimensions & Length

510V0005

Normal Beam up to 200C

High Resistance Wear Surface Tape Roll


0.010" Thick 2 x 5 yds

AS-SW-D13

Page 6 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet

Part Number

Application

Dimensions & Length

510V0006

Guided Waves, Angled Beam and


SV Phased Array at up to 200C

High Resistance Wear Surface Tape Roll


0.005" Thick 2 x 5 yds

2.5. Accessories
2.5.1. Signal Conditioning Box

Two Channel Signal Conditioning Box (245A0132) is required for temate PowerBox 1, 2 and 8. It
provides impedance matching, filtering, and a first stage of amplification between the RF Coil and the
Instrument.

Signal Conditioning Box (279A0010) is required for temate PowerBox H.


Both Signal Conditioning Boxes provides sockets to insert tuning module to match the coil and frequency
desired.
Part
Number

245A0132

Type &
Frequency

2 Channel
Pitch-Catch
Pulse Echo
Angled Beam
& Guided
Waves
(includes 2
slots for
Tuning
Modules)

279A0010

Signal
Conditioning
1 Channel
Pitch-Catch
Pulse Echo
Angled Beam
& Guided
Waves
(includes 1
slot for Tuning
Module)

AS-SW-D13

Probes &
Sensors

274A0244
274A0106
274A0120
274A0108
160A0062
160A0049
160A0076
160A0119
274A0107
274A0144

274A0244
274A0106
274A0107
274A0120
274A0144
274A0108
160A0062
160A0049
160A0076
160A0119

Minimum
Cables
Required*

1 Channel
1-232A0294
1-232A0234
1-232A0296
2-232A0123
1-232A0411
1-232A0411
2 Channel
1-232A0294
2-232A0234
2-232A0296
4-232A0123
1-232A0580

2-232A0123
1-232A0580

Connector
Instrument

Connector
Probe

4-2 Pin Lemo 0B


2-BNC
2-Triax
2-6 Pin Lemo 1B

2 or 4-2
Pin
Lemo 0B

Dimensions

Box
4.25 x 6.77 x 2.50
108mm x 172mm x 64mm
Mounting Holes
2.36 x 7.18 (60mm x 182mm)

Not Applicable
(snap-on
Module)

Page 7 of 18

2-2 Pin
Lemo 0B
19
PinLemo
2B
Type K
Mini

4.16W x 4.48D x 3.63H


105mm x 114mm x 92mm

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


2.5.2. Cables
Necessary to connect the Sensors and RF Coils to the Signal Conditioning Box and Instruments.

Part Number

Length

Connector
Instrument

Connector
Signal
Cond. Box

Connector
Probe

Instrument

Description

232A0123

6
(182cm)

NA

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

All

1 Channel (2 Pin) RF Coil Cable

232A0580

6
(182cm)

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-6 Pin
Lemo 0B

All

2 Channel (2 to 6 Pin) RF Coil


Cable

281A0002

4
(122cm)

1- Lemo
FGG.2G.318

NA

NA

temate
PowerBox H

232A0234

6
(182cm)

1-Triax

1-Triax

NA

temate
PowerBox 1, 2

232A0296

6
(182cm)

1-BNC

1-BNC

NA

temate
PowerBox 1, 2

232A0294

6
(182cm)

1-DB25

1-2 Pin
Lemo 1B

NA

temate
PowerBox 1, 2

232A0308

6
(182cm)

1-DB9

NA

1-8 Pin M12

temate
PowerBox 1, 2

PowerBox H Encoder

1 Channel Transmit Cable for


PowerBox 1 & 2

1 Channel Receive Cable for


PowerBox 1 & 2

Signal Conditioning Box Power


Cable

PowerBox 1, 2 & 8 Encoder


Cable

2.5.3. Encoder
Encoder is selected to be integrated seamlessly with the appropriate instrumentation.
Part
Number

Description

Connector

Probes

Instrument

281A0002

Encoder
Cable Length: 2m
Resolution: 4p/mm -100ppi

Lemo
FGG.2B.319.CLAD62Z

274A0107
274A0144
274A0121

temate
PowerBox H

AS-SW-D13

Page 8 of 18

Picture

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


2.5.4. Sensor Fixtures
Roller-Kit assemblies are recommended for scanning ferromagnetic parts with Permanent Magnet Probes.
Part
Number

Description

Probes

187A0001

4-Wheel Roller Kit for Permanent Magnet Probes

274A0107
274A0144

187A0003

Front-Rear and Side Roller Kit for Large Permanent


Magnet Probes
(used for axial scanning of tubes and rounds)

274A0107
274A0144

AS-SW-D13

Page 9 of 18

Picture

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet

3. temate PowerBox H. Configuration, Setup and Operation


3.1. Equipment Configuration

temate PowerBox H with Signal Conditioning Box and Sensors in Pitch-Catch Mode
Only one sensor is required for Pulse-Echo Operation.

Permanent Magnet Probes Can Create Very Powerful Magnetic Fields


Handle With Care

AS-SW-D13

Page 10 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


3.2. Setup Guide
3.2.1. Rayleigh Waves on Carbon Steel and Aluminum
The table below shows built-in setups for Pitch-Catch (PC) and Pulse-Echo (PE) configurations for most
carbon steels and aluminum using permanent magnet sensor 274A0244.
Depth
mm

RF Coil Options

Configuration

Standard Setup File

Tuning Module

0.5

T-L-MF-0.024x15-0.680-5.000R(-CL)
R-L-MF-0.024x15-0.680-1.000R(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.024-4792kHz
PE-RW-0.024-4792kHz

L/SE-PC-MF-0.024-5000kHz
PE-006

1.0

T-L-MF-0.032x12-0.715-5.000R (-CL)
R-L-MF-0.032x12-0.715-1.000R(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.032-3594kHz
PE-RW-0.032-3594kHz

L/SE-PC-MF-0.032-3500kHz
PE-007

1.5

T-L-M-0.060x12-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.060x12-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.060-1917kHz
PE-RW-0.060-1917kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.060-2000kHz
PE-008

2.0

T-L-M-0.080x8-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.080x8-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.080-1438kHz
PE-RW-0.080-1438kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.080-1500kHz
PE-010

2.5

T-L-M-0.100x7-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.100x7-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.100-1150kHz
PE-RW-0.100-1150kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.010-1250kHz
PE-010

3.0

T-L-M-0.120x5-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.120x5-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.120-958kHz
PE-RW-0.120-958kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.120-1000kHz
PE-011

3.5

T-L-M-0.140x6-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.140x6-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.140-821kHz
PE-RW-0.140-821kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.140-900kHz
PE-010

4.0

T-L-M-0.160x5-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.160x5-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.160-719kHz
PE-RW-0.160-719kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.160-750kHz
PE-011

4.5

T-L-M-0.180x5-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.180x5-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.180-639kHz
PE-RW-0.180-639kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.180-700kHz
PE-011

5.0

T-L-M-0.200x4-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.200x4-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.200-575kHz
PE-RW-0.200-575kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.200-500kHz
PE-011

6.5

T-L-M-0.250x4-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.250x4-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.250-460kHz
PE-RW-0.250-460kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.250-400kHz
PE-012-LF

7.5

T-L-M-0.300x3-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.300x3-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.300-383kHz
PE-RW-0.300-383kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.300-300kHz
PE-012-LF

10.0

T-L-M-0.400x2-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.400x2-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.400-288kHz
PE-RW-0.400-288kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.400-500kHz
PE-013-LF

12.0

T-L-M-0.500x2-1.000(-CL)
R-L-M-0.500x2-1.000(-CL)

PC
PE

PC-RW-0.500-230kHz
PE-RW-0.500-230kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.500-200kHz
PE-013-LF

3.2.2. Rayleigh Waves on Other Materials


For other materials the frequency of Rayleigh waves can be calculated using following relationship:
!"#$%&'! !"#$ =

0.92 !!!"#

Ultrasonic Shear Wave Velocity for a material can be found using standard tables and charts.
Each Emat coil is numbered using a standard nomenclature. Please refer to our catalog Standard
Sensors and Accessories for EMAT Applications.
Wavelength (in inches) of an Emat coil is given by the number following letter M (Meander) or MF
(Meander Focused). For example T-L-M-0.160x5-1.000 is a Transmitter Meander Type Emat coil
with 0.160 inch wavelength.
Using a suitable Emat coil calculate Frequency as per the given relationship.
Select correct Tuning Module for an Emat Coil and intended frequency for generating surface wave
using our standard catalog of Sensor and Accessories.
For more help contact Innerspec technologies.

AS-SW-D13

Page 11 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


3.2.3. Setup File Parameters

Setup File

Frequency and Timing

Signal Conditioning

Material

PC-RW-0.024-4792kHz
PE-RW-0.024-4792kHz

Frequency 4792 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Width 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 4 to 6 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.032-3594kHz
PE-RW-0.032-3594kHz

Frequency 3594 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 2.0 to 5.0 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.060-1917kHz
PE-RW-0.060-1917kHz

Frequency 1917 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 1.0 to 4 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.080-1438kHz
PE-RW-0.080-1438kHz

Frequency 1438 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.5 to 3 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.100-1150kHz
PE-RW-0.100-1150kHz

Frequency 1150 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.5 to 2 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.120-958kHz
PE-RW-0.120-958kHz

Frequency 958 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.5 to 2 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.140-821kHz
PE-RW-0.140-821kHz

Frequency 821 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.4 to 1.6 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.160-719kHz
PE-RW-0.160-719kHz

Frequency 719 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.4 to 1.5 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.180-639kHz
PE-RW-0.180-639kHz

Frequency 639 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.3 to 1.2 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.200-575kHz
PE-RW-0.200-575kHz

Frequency 575 kHz


Tone Bursts 3 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.3 to 1.2 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.250-460kHz
PE-RW-0.250-460kHz

Frequency 460 kHz


Tone Bursts 2 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.2 to 1.0 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

AS-SW-D13

Page 12 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet

Setup File

Frequency and Timing

Signal Conditioning

Material

PC-RW-0.300-383kHz
PE-RW-0.300-383kHz

Frequency 383 kHz


Tone Bursts 2 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.2 to 0.8 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.400-288kHz
PE-RW-0.400-288kHz

Frequency 288 kHz


Tone Bursts 2 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.1 to 0.6 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

PC-RW-0.500-230kHz
PE-RW-0.500-230kHz

Frequency 230 kHz


Tone Bursts 2 Cycles
Data Window 300 usec
Gate 1 Start/Range 18/24 usec
Gate 2 Start/Range 50/200 usec

Gain 15 dB
Coincidence Filter - 3
Averaging - 8
Filter 0.1 to 0.5 MHz

Carbon Steel
Aluminum

These parameters are included in the pre-configured standard Setup Files. The setup files are configured
considering Transmitter and Receiver are placed 3 inches (76 mm) apart in Pitch-Catch configuration. In
Pulse-Echo configuration only Receiver RF coil is used.
The gates are set to look for defects located up to 305mm (12) from the receiver. These configurations
can be modified to optimize the results. The types of modifications include:

Gain adjustments based on material (Carbon Steel or Aluminum)


Coincidence filter to reduce random noise (and reduce PRF)
Average filter to improve signal to noise (and reduce PRF)
Number of cycles. Increase to improve signal to noise on attenuating materials and reduce to improve
axial resolution
Positioning of gates
Setup of automatic thresholds
Filter parameters to improve signal to noise

See the temate PowerBox H Manual for additional details on the operation of the equipment.

AS-SW-D13

Page 13 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


3.3. Operation
3.3.1. Inspection Procedure

Pitch-Catch (PC)
Pulse-Echo (PE)

Select Pitch-Catch or Pulse-Echo inspection technique. For Pitch-Catch (PC) you will need both transmitter
and receiver probes, however, for Pulse-Echo (PE) you will need only receiver probe, which will be used as
transmitter and receiver both.
3.3.2. Pitch-Catch Configuration

Determine the depth of penetration needed for the Rayleigh wave depending upon the application.
Select corresponding Transmitter and Receiver EMAT coils along with the recommended PC type
tuning module (see RF Coils Table).

Attach Signal Condition Box on top of temate PowerBox H.


Insert tuning module in the Signal Conditioning Box.
Connect Instrument with Signal Conditioning Box and Sensors. The transmitter and receiver probes will
be connected to the Tx (T/R) and Rx connector using the corresponding magnet cables.

Power on temate PowerBox H.


Press OPEN, to load the standard Setup File (PC-type) from the internal memory or from USB
memory stick for your application (see Setup Guide).

Ensure External Signal Conditioning Box is selected in TX/RX Tab in the setup menus of temate
PowerBox H.
All setup files are generated assuming Transmitter and Receiver is 3 inch (76 mm) separated
looking for reflection signals from the defects. (Reflection Technique)
Place the sensors on the part to be inspected.
Adjust Gate-1 (Calibration gate) Start and Range on the direct transmit signal from transmitter to the
receiver.
The vertical position of the Gate 1 on the screen can be adjusted by Thres(%) in Gates Tab.
Adjust Gate-2 (Flaw) Start and Range to receive reflections from possible defect within a range of 12
inches (305 mm). To cover a range of 12 inches for reflected signals the gate width should be at least
200 usec.
The vertical position of the Gate 2 on the screen can be adjusted by Thres(%) in Gates Tab.
All Setup files do not include automatic Alarm Thresholds. The setting of threshold will depend upon
users preference depending upon the received amplitude from a reference defect in a given sample.
For setting up Alarm Thresholds, refer to Alarms and Threshold Setting.
Navigate to Display and ensure Views are set for A (50%) +Strip (50%).
Press Gates and ensure Strip1 set for G1 (Amp) and Strip2 set for G2 (Amp).
Press MENU to switch off the menu screen with display maximized to show A-scan and Strip both.
User has the option to select any type of view or combination of views to visualize and record output
data. Other options can be B-scan or A-scan+B-scan View to display amplitudes using a color
palette. The amplitudes in Gate1 and Gate2 will be plotted against the probe position.
You are now ready for manual surface wave inspection.
Press the Start/Stop button to start inspection in manual mode on your samples and move sensors in
a scan pattern for the desired coverage.
In Manual Mode, the data will not be position encoded. For position encoded data, the encoder must be
connected with the instrument and probe.
For encoder setups, refer to the Position Encoded Line Scan Setup.

AS-SW-D13

Page 14 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet

Sample Screen showing both A-scan and Strip Chart data.

Transmitter and Receiver probes can also be used in through transmission configuration where
Gate-1 can be switched-off and only Gate-2 can be used to monitor for any attenuation to the signal
received by the receiver. In this case the Transmitter and Receiver probes are separated by a
maximum distance of 24 inch (610 mm) to cover the desired area of inspection. (Thru-Transmission
Technique).
In Attenuation mode the G2 will receive the sound transmitted directly by the transmitter. In case of
defect the amplitude of this signal will drop from its nominal value indicating a defect. The G2 start and
width needs to be adjusted as per the separation between the probes.

AS-SW-D13

Page 15 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


3.3.3. Alarms and Threshold Setting
This inspection can be performed with A(50%)+Strip(50%) or A(50%)+B(50%) View. The Measurement Bar
must be set to Alarm from Display Tab. The threshold for inspection validity and flaw must be carefully
adjusted. The following procedure is demonstrated with A(50%)+B(50%) view as display option:

Press GATE and navigate to the Gate1 Menu. Adjust Gate 1 Parameters to select Threshold
(Alarm 1), Set Crossing to Validity and Amplitude Threshold to 20%. If Calibration or Direct Transmit
Signal drops below the amplitude threshold limit the inspection data becomes invalid and plotted with a
yellow color band in B-scan. The Alarm Measurement Bar would also indicate G1 Invalid with Yellow
color.
We can also set automated Flaw Threshold Alarm when the defect amplitude crosses above a preset
threshold. Select Amp Threshold (Alarm2) under Gate 2 Parameters by selecting Gate 2 Menu
( button). Set the Max Amp Thres to the desired value (e.g., 15%) with Crossing set to Above.
This will ensure whenever a defect response exceeds the threshold, B-scan color will change to
RED.
Transmitter and Receiver probes can also be used in through transmission configuration where
Gate-1 can be switched-off and only Gate-2 can be used to monitor for any attenuation to the signal
received by the receiver. In this case the Transmitter and Receiver probes are separated by a
maximum distance of 24 inch (610 mm) to cover the desired area of inspection. (Thru Transmission
Technique)
To detect attenuation of the received signal automatically, the Gate 2 Max Amp Thres should be
adjusted to the desired attenuation level (e.g., 30%) with Crossing set to Below. This will ensure
whenever received signal drops below the threshold, B-scan color will change to RED band.

Sample Screens showing both A-scan and B-scan data.


Note:

In case of Strip Chart view the defect will only be indicated in Measurement Bar with Amplitude
Alarm on G2 changing color into RED. This failure indication will not be shown on strip chart.
The Alarm output is also available from Input/output connector, which can be used to drive other
alarming devices like an audible alarm or large red failure lamp.

AS-SW-D13

Page 16 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


3.3.4. Pulse-Echo Configuration

Determine the depth of penetration needed for the Rayleigh wave depending upon the application.
Select corresponding Transmitter EMAT coil along with the recommended PE type tuning module
(see RF Coils Table).
Insert tuning module in Channel-1 of the Signal Conditioning Box.
Connect Sensor and Signal Conditioning Box for Channel-1. Only transmitter probe will be connected at
the output of the signal conditioning box.

Power on temate PowerBox H.


Press OPEN, to load the standard Setup File (PE-type) from Internal memory or USB memory stick
for your application (see Setup Guide).
Place the sensor on the part to be inspected.
All setup files are generated looking for reflection signals from the defects (Reflection Technique).
Gate-1 is not used in this setup and is not selected.
Gate-2 is used to receive the reflection signal from the defects. Same probe is used as transmitter and
receiver which can cover maximum 12 inches (305 mm) of inspection area.
Adjust Gate-2 (Flaw) Start and Range to receive reflections from possible defect within a range of 12
inches (305 mm). To cover a range of 12 inches for reflected signals the gate width should be at least
200 usec.
The vertical position of the Gate 2 on the screen can be adjusted by Thres(%).
All Setup files do not include automatic Alarm Thresholds. The setting of threshold will depend upon
users preference depending upon the received amplitude from a reference defect in a given sample.
Navigate to Display and ensure Views are set for A (50%)+Strip(50%).
Press Gates and ensure Strip1 set for G2(Amp)..
Press MENU to switch off the menu screen with display maximized to show A-scan and Strip both.
User has the option to select any type of view or combination of views to visualize and record output
data. Other options can be B-scan or A-scan+B-scan Views to display amplitude in Gate2 plotted
against the probe position.
You are now ready for manual surface wave inspection.
Press the Start/Stop button to start inspection in manual mode on your samples and move sensors in
a scan pattern for the desired coverage.
In Manual Mode the data will not be position encoded. For position encoded data, the magnets without
integrated encoders must connect and external encoder to both instrument and probe.
For encoder setup refers to the Position Encoded Line Scan Setup.

Sample Scan - Pulse-Echo Mode in Strip and B-scan View

AS-SW-D13

Page 17 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Surface Inspection with EMAT Application Sheet


3.3.5. Line Scans

Mount Encoder (PN 281A0002) to magnets without integrated encoders and connect to instrument.
Place probe with encoder on the part to be inspected.
Select View to display A-Scan+Strip Chart or A-scan+B-scan.
{A(50%)+Strip(50%) or A(50%)+B(50%)}
Perform all setups for Pitch-Catch or Pulse-Echo.
Select DAQ tab and check Trigger Source to Encoder.
Select Axis1(X/Scan) and edit Start to 0, Stop to 500 (length of scan in mm) and Pitch to 12 units
(assuming the units selected are mm). Encoder PN 281A0002 provides a pulse or tick every 0.25 mm,
therefore a pitch of 12 implies that each sample will be taken at 3mm intervals.
The pitch of the encoder defines the distance between 2 samples or triggers generated by the external
encoder. The user is free to select any desired pitch suitable for the application.

3.3.5.1. Encoder Calibration

The encoder supplied by Innerspec technologies is already calibrated by default and no calibration is
needed. The encoder supplied by Innerspec Technologies provides a tick every 0.25mm.
In case user wants to integrate a different encoder, the following procedure should be adopted to
calibrate the encoder.
Press 0 besides Set button and Edit ENCODERS CAL Position to any value (e.g. 200 mm) and start
inspection. Pulsing will start as soon as the encoder starts moving. Confirm that the X-position display
in the status bar is 0.
Move the encoder by the value chosen (e.g. 200 mm) and press Set. The reading below Set should
display 0.xx mm/tick (User should know the distance per tick for the type of encoder used). It should
not be a zero value. If value is zero repeat the calibration process.
Stop pulsing. The encoder is calibrated and is ready to scan.

3.3.5.2. Scanning with Encoder

Start pulsing and wait for X-position display to go to 0 in the status bar. Normally a message will flash
that Wait while device is preparing for Scan. After this message the device is ready for scan
movement.
Move the probe and encoder. The A-scan or strip-chart/b-scan should update as the encoder moves
forward.
On strip chart mode, moving forward will update new values, reversing the direction will repaint the
trace backwards. This feature is interesting if during scan a part of the sample wasnt read correctly, or
to confirm response from a certain area. Press stop when finished.
Every time user stops pulsing and restarts, the x-scan will be reset to 0 and will be treated as a new
scan.

AS-SW-D13

Page 18 of 18

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

EUROPE
ASIA
AMERICAS
Innerspec Technologies, Inc. Innerspec Technologies Europe, S.L. Innerspec Technologies China, LLC.
Avenida Madrid km. 27.2, nave 8
Building #15, 333 Qingtong Rd.
4004 Murray Place
28802 Alcal de Henares, SPAIN
Shanghai, 201203, CHINA
Lynchburg, VA 24501, USA
Tel:
+34-918-776-369
Tel/Fax: +86-(0)21-50177535
Tel: +1-434.948.1301
Fax: +34-911-881-344
www.innerspec.com/cn
Fax: +1-434.948.1313
www.innerspec.com/eu
www.innerspec.com

Shear Vertical Angled Beam with EMAT


Application Sheet
Rev. AS-SV-D13

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.


All Rights Reserved
This Material May Not Be Published, Rewritten,
or Redistributed Without Express Permission

Page 1 of 11

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Vertical Angle Beam with EMAT

Table of Contents
1. Shear Vertical Angled Beam .................................................................................................................... 3
2. Equipment Options ................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.

Instrumentation ................................................................................................................................ 4

2.2.

Permanent Magnet Probe + RF Coil Options .................................................................................. 4

2.3.

RF Coils ........................................................................................................................................... 5

2.3.1.
2.4.

Wear Surfaces ......................................................................................................................... 5

Accessories ..................................................................................................................................... 6

2.4.1.

Signal Conditioning Box ........................................................................................................... 6

2.4.2.

Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 7

2.4.3.

Encoder ................................................................................................................................... 7

2.4.4.

Sensor Fixtures ........................................................................................................................ 7

3. temate PowerBox H. Configuration, Setup and Operation .................................................................... 8


3.1.

Equipment Configuration ................................................................................................................. 8

3.2.

Setup Guide ..................................................................................................................................... 9

3.2.1.

Shear Vertical Angle Beam on Carbon Steel ........................................................................... 9

3.2.2.

Shear Vertical Angle Beam on Other Materials ....................................................................... 9

3.3.

Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 10

3.3.1.

Inspection Procedure ............................................................................................................. 10

3.3.2.

Line Scans ............................................................................................................................. 10

AS-SV-D13

Page 2 of 11

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Vertical Angle Beam with EMAT


1. Shear Vertical Angled Beam
Introduction
The Shear Vertical wave mode (SV) or shear mode
with vertical polarization is the standard shear mode
used with piezoelectric transducers, and is the most
common wave for inspection of welds and large
volumes with angled beams.
Generation of Shear Vertical with piezoelectric
transducers is limited (approximately) to angles
between 30 and 60. Lower and higher angles are
very difficult to generate because of refraction
limitations.
Without the restrictions of Snells law of refraction,
EMATs are theoretically capable of generating any
Shear Wave mode at any angle. However, for
practical purposes, Shear Vertical modes provide
maximum efficiency and power at 35, whereas
Shear Horizontal (SH) modes are highly efficient
from 40 to 90. Figure 1 shows the angular range
of ultrasonic wave generation with EMAT.
Figure 1. Angular Range of ultrasonic waves with EMAT

Characteristics
Direction of Propagation: At an angle from the entry wall.
Sensor Configuration: Pulse-echo (pitch-catch possible, but not covered in this Application Sheet).
Wave modes: Shear Vertical optimized at 35 in frequencies ranging from 1.4MHz to 3.8MHz.
Materials Inspected: Ferromagnetic and non-ferromagnetic metals.
Applications
Flaw detection, including weld inspection.
EMAT Uniqueness
Dry and non-contact (up to 1mm lift-off depending on application and frequency). Ideal for automated
and hot environments.
Not affected by surface conditions (coatings, oil, oxide). Capable of inspecting rough and pitted
surfaces.
Inspection at temperatures of up to 400F (200C) with standard transducers without active cooling.
Inspection at higher temperatures possible with active cooling.
Frequency beam steering. By using a coil with fixed wavelength, the angle of sound can be modified by
changing the frequency of the instrument.

AS-SV-D13

Page 3 of 11

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Vertical Angle Beam with EMAT


2. Equipment Options
2.1. Instrumentation
Innerspec offers several portable systems that can be used for Shear Vertical Angle Beam inspections.

temate PowerBox H with PowerUT H software. Hand-Held and battery operated for spot
measurements and manual scanning.

temate PowerBox 1, 2 & 8 with PowerUT software. Portable systems used for automated or semiautomated inspections.
For detailed Technical Specifications for each instrument, visit our website or contact Innerspec
Technologies.

The software described in this Application Sheet applies only to the temate PowerBox H instrument.
2.2. Permanent Magnet Probe + RF Coil Options
Innerspec offers a selection of permanent and pulsed electromagnets that can be paired with coils of
different wavelengths to generate Shear Vertical modes at different frequencies and angles. Permanent
magnets can be used for SV generation with Lorentz forces that can be used on ferromagnetic and nonferromagnetic metals. This Application Sheet covers only the generation of Shear Vertical energy with
permanent magnets. Consult Innerspec for information on applications with electromagnets.
Separate permanent magnet probes and RF Coils (Sensor = Magnet + RF Coil) are a versatile and
economic alternative to have solutions for multiple applications with minimum investment. Innerspec offers
several permanent magnet options rated at 80C and 200C.

Part Number

Magnet Type

274A0244
Large L

Permanent
High-Temp
200C Magnet

(Replaces
274A0107,
274A0144)

274A0107
Large L

Magnetic
Field

Dimensions

Normal
Integrated
Wheel Kit &
Encoder

AS-SV-D13

Supports all
connectorless RF
Coils.

Optional
Roller Kits
and Encoder
for scanning

Permanent
1 x 1 face
temate
PowerBox H
PowerBox 1
PowerBox 2

Normal

(Discontinued)

Other

temate
PowerBox H
PowerBox 1
PowerBox 2

(Discontinued)

274A0144
Large - L

Applicable
Instrument

Permanent
1 x 1 face
Temp 200C

Page 4 of 11

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Vertical Angle Beam with EMAT


2.3. RF Coils
See Catalog of Sensors & Accessories for bandwidth and other details for each RF Coil. Connectorless
(-CL) versions of each coil are available for use with the 274A0244 magnet.
Angle

Coil Part Number

Function

Coil
Period
in

Coil
Period
mm

Freq
MHz

Tuning
Module

35

R-L-M-0.060x12-1.000 (-CL)

T/R

0.060

1.5

3.78

PE-004

35

R-L-M-0.070x10-1.000 (-CL)

T/R

0.070

1.78

3.24

PE-005

35

R-L-M-0.080x8-1.000 (-CL)

T/R

0.080

2.0

2.83

PE-007

35

R-L-M-0.100x7-1.000 (-CL)

T/R

0.100

2.5

2.27

PE-007

35

R-L-M-0.120x5-1.000 (-CL)

T/R

0.120

3.0

1.89

PE-008

35

R-L-M-0.140x6-1.000 (-CL)

T/R

0.140

3.6

1.62

PE-007

35

R-L-M-0.160x5-1.000 (-CL)

T/R

0.160

4.1

1.42

PE-007

NOTE: For Pulse-Echo Configuration, only Receiver coil is used as transmitter and receiver along with
Pulse Echo tuning modules (PE). For Pitch Catch operation (not applicable here) use PC modules
2.3.1. Wear Surfaces
Wear Surface is necessary to protect and extend the life of the RF Coil. Wear surface 510V0006 is the
recommended option for most applications. Thicker wear surface (510V0005) should only be used on
larger wavelengths (0.200 and greater) and rough materials.
Standard RF coil wear surfaces protect the RF coil against abrasion and puncture. The wear surfaces
should be replaced if they are torn, worn out or wrinkled to avoid damage to the RF coil. For optimum
performance use only the wear surface suggested in this Application Sheet.

Part Number

Application

Dimensions & Length

510V0005

Normal Beam up to 200C

High Resistance Wear Surface Tape Roll


0.010" Thick 2 x 5 yds

510V0006

Guided Waves, Angled Beam and


SV Phased Array at up to 200C

High Resistance Wear Surface Tape Roll


0.005" Thick 2 x 5 yds

AS-SV-D13

Page 5 of 11

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Vertical Angle Beam with EMAT


2.4. Accessories
2.4.1. Signal Conditioning Box

Two Channel Signal Conditioning Box (245A0132) is required for temate PowerBox 1 and 2. It provides
impedance matching, filtering, and a first stage of amplification between the RF Coil and the Instrument.

Signal Conditioning Box (279A0010) is required for temate PowerBox H.


Both Signal Conditioning Boxes provide sockets to insert the tuning module to match the coil and frequency
desired.
Part
Number

245A0132

Type &
Frequency

2 Channel
Pitch-Catch
PulseEchoAngled
Beam &
Guided
Waves
(includes 2
slots for
Tuning
Modules)

279A0010

Signal
Conditioning
1 Channel
Pitch-Catch
Pulse Echo
Angled Beam
& Guided
Waves
(includes 1
slot for Tuning
Module)

AS-SV-D13

Probes &
Sensors

274A0244
274A0106
274A0120
274A0108
160A0062
160A0049
160A0076
160A0119
274A0107
274A0144

274A0244
274A0106
274A0120
274A0108
160A0062
160A0049
160A0076
160A0119
274A0107
274A0144

Required
Cables

1 Channel
1-232A0294
1-232A0234
1-232A0296
2-232A0123
1-232A0411
1-232A0411
2 Channel
1-232A0294
2-232A0234
2-232A0296
4-232A0123
1-232A0580

Connector
Instrument

Probe
Connector

4-2 PinLemo 0B
2-BNC
2-Triax
2-6 Pin Lemo 1B

2 or 4-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

Dimensions

Box
4.25 x 6.77 x 2.50
108mm x 172mm x 64mm
Mounting Holes
2.36 x 7.18 (60mm x 182mm)

2 to 2 Pin
Lemo 0B
2-232A0123
1-232A0580

Not Applicable
(snap-on
Module)

19 PinLemo
Type K Mini

4.16W x 4.48D x 3.63H


105mm x 114mm x 92mm

Page 6 of 11

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Vertical Angle Beam with EMAT


2.4.2. Cables
Necessary to connect the Sensors and RF Coils to the Signal Conditioning Box and Instruments.
Part
Number

Length

Instrument
Connector

Connector
Signal
Cond. Box

Connector
Probe

Instrument

Description

232A0123

6
(182cm)

NA

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

All

1 Channel (2 Pin) RF Coil Cable

232A0234

6
1
(182cm)

1-Triax

1-Triax

NA

PowerBox 1, 2

1 Channel Transmit Cable for


PowerBox 1 & 2

232A0296

6
2
(182cm)

1-BNC

1-BNC

NA

PowerBox 1, 2

1 Channel Receive Cable for


PowerBox 1 & 2

232A0294

6
2
(182cm)

1-DB25

1-2 Pin
Lemo 1B

NA

PowerBox 1, 2

Signal Conditioning Box Power


Cable

232A0580

6
2
(182cm)

NA

1-2 Pin
Lemo

1-6 Pin
Lemo

All

2 Channel (6 Pin) RF Coil Cable

Other lengths up to 150 (50m) available upon request

2.4.3. Encoder
Encoder is selected to be integrated seamlessly with the appropriate instrumentation.
Part
Number

Description

Connector

Probes

Instrument

281A0002

Encoder
Cable Length: 2m
Resolution: 4p/mm -100ppi

Lemo
FGG.2B.319.CLAD62Z

274A0107
274A0144
274A0121

temate
PowerBox H

Picture

2.4.4. Sensor Fixtures


Roller-Kit assemblies are recommended for scanning ferromagnetic parts with Permanent Magnet Probes.

Part Number

Description

Probes

187A0001

4-Wheel Roller Kit for Permanent Magnet Probes

274A0107
274A0144

187A0003

Front-Rear and Side Roller Kit for Large Permanent


Magnet Probes
(used for axial scanning of tubes and rounds)

274A0107
274A0144

AS-SV-D13

Page 7 of 11

Picture

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Vertical Angle Beam with EMAT

3. temate PowerBox H. Configuration, Setup and Operation


3.1. Equipment Configuration

Signal
Conditioning Box
with tuning Module

T/R

temate PowerBox H with Signal Conditioning Box and Sensors in Pulse Echo Mode

Permanent Magnet Probes Can Create Very Powerful Magnetic Fields


Handle With Care

AS-SV-D13

Page 8 of 11

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Vertical Angle Beam with EMAT


3.2. Setup Guide
3.2.1. Shear Vertical Angle Beam on Carbon Steel
The table below shows built-in setups for and Pulse-Echo (PE) configurations for carbon steels using
permanent magnet sensors 274A0244. (Note: 274A0107 magnet may also be used, but required coils with
connectors.)
Angle

RF Coil Options

Configuration

Standard Setup File

Tuning Module

R-L-M-0.060x12-1.000 (-CL)

PE

PE-SV-0.060-3777kHz

PE-004

35

R-L-M-0.070x10-1.000 (-CL)

PE

PE-SV-0.070-3238kHz

PE-005

35

35

R-L-M-0.080x8-1.000 (-CL)

PE

PE-SV-0.080-2833kHz

PE-007

35

R-L-M-0.100x7-1.000 (-CL)

PE

PE-SV-0.100-2266kHz

PE-007

35

R-L-M-0.120x5-1.000 (-CL)

PE

PE-SV-0.120-1889kHz

PE-008

35

R-L-M-0.140x6-1.000 (-CL)

PE

PE-SV-0.140-1619kHz

PE-007

35

R-L-M-0.160x5-1.000 (-CL)

PE

PE-SV-0.160-1417kHz

PE-007

3.2.2. Shear Vertical Angle Beam on Other Materials


For other materials the frequency of Shear Vertical Angle beam can be calculated using following
relationship:

Frequency SVAngleBeam =

VelShear
Wavelength sin

Ultrasonic Shear Wave Velocity for a material can be found using standard tables and charts.
Each EMAT coil is numbered using a standard nomenclature. Please refer to our catalog Standard
Sensors and Accessories for EMAT Applications.
Wavelength (in inches) of an EMAT coil is given by the number following letter M (Meander) or MF
(Meander Focused). For example T-L-M-0.160x5-1.000 is a Transmitter Meander Type EMAT coil
with 0.160 inch wavelength.
Using a suitable EMAT coil calculate Frequency as per the given relationship.
Select correct Tuning Module for an EMAT Coil and intended frequency for generating Shear
Vertical Angle Beam using our standard catalog of Sensor and Accessories.
For more help contact Innerspec Technologies.

AS-SV-D13

Page 9 of 11

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Vertical Angle Beam with EMAT


3.3. Operation
3.3.1. Inspection Procedure

Select coil. Smaller wavelengths will permit higher frequencies. For Pulse-Echo operation only the
receiver coil should be used. Insert appropriate PE tuning module in signal conditioning slot.
Calculate the frequency for the selected coil and select the appropriate PE type tuning module (see
RF Coils Table).
Insert tuning module in the Signal Conditioning Box slot.
Connect Sensor and Signal Conditioning Box for Channel-1. Only transmitter probe will be connected at
the output of the signal conditioning box.

Power on temate PowerBox H.


Adjust the frequency and gate settings.
Place the sensor on the part to be inspected.
All setup files are generated looking for reflection signals from the defects (Reflection Technique).
Gate-1 is not used in this setup and is shouldnt be selected.
Gate-2 is used as the flaw gate. Maximum coverage is around 305mm (12) of inspection area.
Adjust Gate-2 Start and Range for distance. For 305mm the gate width should be at least 200 sec.
The vertical position of the Gate 2 on the screen will determine the threshold level for alarm purposes.
The built-in setup files do not include automatic Alarm Thresholds, which should be set by the user.
Select the display preference (A, B, C Scans or strip chart). If strip is selected, set Strip 1 to G2(Amp)..
Press the Start/Stop button to start inspection in manual mode on your samples and move sensors in
a scan pattern for the desired coverage.
In Manual Mode the data will not be position encoded. For position-encoded data, magnets without
integrated encoders must have them connected to the instrument and probe.
For encoder setup refers to the Position Encoded Line Scan Setup.

Sample Scan - Pulse-Echo Mode in Strip and B-scan View


3.3.2. Line Scans

Mount Encoder (PN 281A0002) to magnets without integrated encoders and connect to instrument.
Select DAQ tab and check Trigger Source to Encoder.
Select Axis1(X/Scan) and edit Start to 0, Stop to 500 (length of scan in mm) and Pitch to 12 units
(assuming the units selected are mm). Encoder PN 281A0002 provides a pulse or tick every 0.25 mm,
therefore a pitch of 12 implies that each sample will be taken at 3mm intervals.
The pitch of the encoder defines the distance between 2 samples or triggers generated by the external
encoder. The user is free to select any desired pitch suitable for the application.

3.3.2.1. Encoder Calibration

The encoder supplied by Innerspec Technologies is already calibrated by default and no calibration is
needed. The encoder supplied by Innerspec Technologies provides a tick every 0.25mm.

AS-SV-D13

Page 10 of 11

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Vertical Angle Beam with EMAT

In case user wants to integrate a different encoder, the following procedure should be adopted to
calibrate the encoder.
Press 0 besides Set button and Edit ENCODERS CAL Position to any value (e.g. 200 mm) and start
inspection. Pulsing will start as soon as the encoder starts moving. Confirm that the X-position display
in the status bar is 0.
Move the encoder by the value chosen (e.g. 200 mm) and press Set. The reading below Set should
display 0.xx mm/tick (User should know the distance per tick for the type of encoder used). It should
not be a zero value. If value is zero repeat the calibration process.
Stop pulsing. The encoder is calibrated and is ready to scan.

3.3.2.2. Scanning with Encoder

Start pulsing and wait for X-position display to go to 0 in the status bar. Normally a message will flash
that Wait while device is preparing for Scan. After this message the device is ready for scan
movement.
Move the probe and encoder. The A-scan or strip-chart/b-scan should update as the encoder moves
forward.
On strip chart mode, moving forward will update new values, reversing the direction will repaint the
trace backwards. This feature is interesting if during scan a part of the sample wasnt read correctly, or
to confirm response from a certain area. Press stop when finished.
Every time user stops pulsing and restarts, the x-scan will be reset to 0 and will be treated as a new
scan.

AS-SV-D13

Page 11 of 11

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

EUROPE
ASIA
AMERICAS
Innerspec Technologies, Inc. Innerspec Technologies Europe, S.L. Innerspec Technologies China, LLC.
Avenida Madrid km. 27.2, nave 8
Building #15, 333 Qingtong Rd.,
4004 Murray Place
28802 Alcal de Henares, SPAIN
Shanghai, China 201203
Lynchburg, VA 24501, USA
Tel:
+34-918-776-369
Tel/Fax: +86-(0)21-50177535
Tel: +1-434.948.1301
Fax: +34-911-881-344
www.innerspec.com/cn
Fax: +1-434.948.1313
www.innerspec.com/eu
www.innerspec.com

Shear Horizontal Angled Beam with EMAT


Application Sheet
Rev. AS-SH-B13

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.


All Rights Reserved
This Material May Not Be Published, Rewritten,
or Redistributed Without Express Permission

Page 1 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT

SH Wave Beam Steering with EMAT


Application Sheet (AS-SH-A12)

Contents
1. Introduction & EMAT Technique .............................................................................................................. 3
2. Equipment Options ................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1.

Instrumentation ................................................................................................................................ 3

2.2.

Sensors & Accessories .................................................................................................................... 4

2.3.

Permanent Magnet Probe and RF Coil ........................................................................................... 4

2.4.

RF Coils. .......................................................................................................................................... 4

2.5.

Wear Surfaces. ................................................................................................................................ 5

2.6.

Accessories ..................................................................................................................................... 6

2.4.1.

Signal Conditioning Box ........................................................................................................... 6

2.4.2.

Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 7

2.6.1.

Encoder ................................................................................................................................... 7

2.4.3.

Sensor and Probe Fixtures ...................................................................................................... 8

3. temate PowerBox H. Configuration, Setup and Operation .................................................................... 9


3.1.

Equipment Configuration ................................................................................................................. 9

3.2.

Beam Steering Principle ................................................................................................................ 10

3.3.

Equipment Configuration-1 (Side-by-Side) .................................................................................... 11

3.4.

Equipment Configuration-2 (Tandem) ........................................................................................... 12

3.5.

Setup Guide ................................................................................................................................... 14

3.6.

Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 16

3.6.1.

Inspection Procedure ............................................................................................................. 16

3.6.2.

Line Scans ............................................................................................................................. 16

3.6.3.

Encoder Calibration ............................................................................................................... 17

3.6.4.

Scanning with Encoder .......................................................................................................... 17

AS-SH-B13

Page 2 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


1. Introduction & EMAT Technique

EMAT ultrasonic is an ideal method for generating Shear Horizontal


Waves on conductive materials.
The advantages include:
o Dry, non-contact inspection permits inspection of very hot (up to
1000C) and very cold materials. Lack of couplant also provides
extremely reliable and repeatable inspections with micrometer
accuracy.
o Imperviousness to surface conditions. The materials can be
coated, rough or dirty thus eliminating the need for conditioning
the part for inspection.
o Easier probe deployment. Since the sound is generated on the
part, the direction of sound is not dependent on the angle of the
sensor and facilitates inspection and integration.
o
o Possibility to steer the beam for all angles starting from 0 degrees (normal to the sensor) up to
o
90 degrees (parallel to the surface).
o Ability to penetrate through the dendritic shaped coarse grain structure of Austenitic Steel
without significant beam skew.
o SH wave do not mode convert at structure boundaries thus providing easier signal
interpretation.
For this application EMAT sensors can only be used in pitch-catch (separate but identical transmitter
and receiver) mode.
Both transmitter and Receiver sensors can be configured side-by-side or in tandem depending upon the
availability of the space.
SH waves can be very easily generated on both ferromagnetic and non-ferromagnetic materials.
This Application Sheet covers SH beam steering in Aluminum, Carbon Steel and Stainless Steel by
changing the frequency of excitation.

2. Equipment Options
2.1. Instrumentation
Innerspec offers several portable systems that can be used for thickness measurement.

temate PowerBox H with PowerUT H software. Hand-Held and battery operated for spot
measurements and manual scanning.

temate PowerBox 1, 2 & 8 with PowerUT software. Portable systems used for automated or semiautomated inspections.

For detailed Technical Specifications for each instrument, visit our website or contact Innerspec
Technologies.

AS-SH-B13

Page 3 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


2.2. Sensors & Accessories
Innerspec offers Permanent Magnet Array sensor with spiral shaped EMAT coil. It is used mainly for
inspection of austenitic materials. Steering is achieved by changing the frequency of the instrument. Only
used in pitch-catch configuration with two probes (identical) or one probe (tandem both transmitter and
receiver).
Consult our Catalog of Standard Sensors & Accessories for detailed Technical Specifications for the Sensor
and RF Coil.
2.3. Permanent Magnet Probe and RF Coil
Separate Probes and RF Coils permit easy replacement of RF Coils. These Probes are all rated for
maximum temperature of 80C except when noted otherwise. For High temperature applications contact
Innerspec Technologies for customized sensors.

Part Number

Magnet Type

Magnetic
Field

Permanent
Magnet Array
1 x 1 face

274A0121
Large
L

Applicable
Instrument

Other

Normal

PowerBox H
PowerBox 1
PowerBox 2
PowerBox 8

Optional
Roller Kits
and Encoder
for scanning

Normal

PowerBox H
PowerBox 1
PowerBox 2
PowerBox 8

Optional
Roller Kits
and Encoder
for scanning

Dimensions

Magnet Poles
1/2 x 1/8

Permanent
Magnet Array
1 x 0.75 face

274A0201
Special
SP

Magnet Poles
1/2 x1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1.57 x 1.84 x 2.95
40mm x 50mm x 75mm

2.4. RF Coils.
See Catalog of Sensors & Accessories for beam profiles and other details for the RF Coil.

AS-SH-B13

Part Number

Compatible
Probe

Geometry

Width
(inch)

Length
(inch)

Remarks

PC-LA-R-1.000-2.000

274A0121

Racetrack

1.000

2.000

Identical
Transmitter
and
Receiver

280A0242 Rev A

274A0201

Racetrack

0.75

2.000

Transmitter

280A0243 Rev A

274A0201

Racetrack

0.75

2.000

Receiver

Page 4 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


2.5. Wear Surfaces.
Standard RF coil wear surfaces protect the RF coil against abrasion and puncture. The wear surfaces
should be replaced if they are torn, worn out or wrinkled to avoid damage to the RF coil. For optimum
performance use only the wear surface suggested in this Application Sheet.

Part Number

Application

Dimensions & Length

510V0005

Normal Beam up to 200C

High Resistance Wear Surface Tape Roll


0.010" Thick 2 x 5 yds

510V0006

Guided Waves, Angled Beam and


SV Phased Array at up to 200C

High Resistance Wear Surface Tape Roll


0.005" Thick 2 x 5 yds

510V0008

SH Phased Array Sensors up to 200C

High Resistance Wear Surface Tape Roll


0.002" Thick 2 x 5 yds

AS-SH-B13

Page 5 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


2.6. Accessories
2.4.1.

Signal Conditioning Box

Two Channel Signal Conditioning Box (245A0132) is required for temate PowerBox 1 and 2. It provides
impedance matching, filtering, and a first stage of amplification between the RF Coil and the Instrument.

Signal Conditioning Box (279A0010) is required for temate PowerBox H.


Both Signal Conditioning Boxes provide sockets to insert the tuning module to match the coil and frequency
desired.
Part
Number

Type &
Frequency

245A0132

2 Channel
Pitch-Catch
Pulse-Echo
Angled Beam
& Guided
Waves
(includes 2
slots for
Tuning
Modules)

279A0010

Signal
Conditioning
1 Channel
Pitch-Catch
Pulse Echo
Angled Beam
& Guided
Waves
(includes 1
slot for Tuning
Module)

AS-SH-B13

Probes &
Sensors

274A0106
274A0107
274A0120
274A0144
274A0108
160A0062
160A0049
160A0076
160A0119

274A0106
274A0107
274A0120
274A0144
274A0108
160A0062
160A0049
160A0076
160A0119

Minimum
Cables
Required*

1 Channel
1-232A0294
1-232A0234
1-232A0296
2-232A0123
1-232A0411
1-232A0411
2 Channel
1-232A0294
2-232A0234
2-232A0296
4-232A0123

2-232A0123

Connector
Instrument

Connector
Probe

4-2 Pin Lemo 0B


2-BNC
2-Triax
2-6 Pin Lemo 1B

2 or 4-2
Pin
Lemo 0B

Dimensions

Box
4.25 x 6.77 x 2.50
108mm x 172mm x 64mm
Mounting Holes
2.36 x 7.18 (60mm x 182mm)

Not Applicable
(snap-on
Module)

Page 6 of 17

2-2 Pin
Lemo 0B
19
PinLemo
2B
Type K
Mini

4.16W x 4.48D x 3.63H


105mm x 114mm x 92mm

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


2.4.2.

Cables

Necessary to connect the Sensors and RF Coils to the Signal Conditioning Box and Instruments.

Part Number

Length

Connector
Instrument

Connector
Signal
Cond. Box

Connector
Probe

Instrument

Description

232A0123

2 (60cm)

NA

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

All

1 Channel (2 Pin) RF Coil Cable

232A0234

6
(182cm)

1-Triax

1-Triax

NA

PowerBox 1, 2

1 Channel Transmit Cable for


PowerBox 1 & 2

232A0296

6
(182cm)

1-BNC

1-BNC

NA

PowerBox 1, 2

1 Channel Receive Cable for


PowerBox 1 & 2

232A0294

6
(182cm)

1-DB25

1-2 Pin
Lemo 1B

NA

PowerBox 1, 2

Signal Conditioning Box Power


Cable

232A0308

6
(182cm)

1-DB9

NA

1-8 Pin M12

PowerBox 1, 2

PowerBox 1, 2 & 8 Encoder


Cable

2.6.1. Encoder
Encoder is selected to be integrated seamlessly with the appropriate instrumentation.
Part
Number

Description

Connector

Probes

Instrument

281A0002

Encoder
Cable Length: 2m
Resolution: 4p/mm -100ppi

Lemo
FGG.2B.319.CLAD62Z

274A0107
274A0144
274A0121

temate
PowerBox H

AS-SH-B13

Page 7 of 17

Picture

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


2.4.3.

Sensor and Probe Fixtures

Roller-Kit assemblies are recommended for scanning ferromagnetic parts with Permanent Magnet Probes,
and handles are used for spot checking through insulation inspection holes with our high-temperature
sensors.
Part
Number

Description

Probes

187A0001

4-Wheel Roller Kit for Permanent Magnet Probes

274A0106
274A0107
274A0144
274A0120
274A0108

187A0003

Front-Rear and Side Roller Kit for Large Permanent


Magnet Probes
(used for axial scanning of tubes and rounds)

274A0107
274A0144
274A0120

160A0071

SH Sensor Positioning Fixture with Built-In Scales for


Angle (Yaw) and Distance to Pivoting Point

274A0133

AS-SH-B13

Page 8 of 17

Picture

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT

3. temate PowerBox H. Configuration, Setup and Operation


3.1. Equipment Configuration

Figure 1: Power Box H and Angle Beam Sensors

Permanent Magnet Probes Can Create Very Powerful Magnetic Fields


Handle With Care

AS-SH-B13

Page 9 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


3.2. Beam Steering Principle
Ultrasonic angle beam inspection can be achieved using EMAT probe 274A0121 and probe 274A0201. The
principle of beam angle control is illustrated in Figure1.

Figure 2: Principle of angle beam excitation with EMAT


The red and green dots refer to the alternate pole locations of the permanent magnet array probe where the
RF coil in a racetrack geometrical shape carries current in a fixed direction. The interaction of RF current
with the alternating magnetic field due to the alternate north and south poles generates a periodic loading
pattern. The basic beam steering formula is given in Equation 1.
For Emat Probe 274A0121 and Probe 274A0201:
= 0.25 (6.35 )

Here, is the angle of steering, f is the excitation frequency and C is the velocity of the wave mode. For
shear wave = ! .

AS-SH-B13

Page 10 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


3.3. Equipment Configuration-1 (Side-by-Side)
In this configuration Transmitter and Receiver Probes is placed side by side at a small angle (between 20 to
30 degrees) facing the weld as shown in the Figure-2. Probe fixture 160A0071 can be used to hold the
probes at a fixed angle. The angle between the probes can be readout from the fixture. The arms of the
fixture will also provide the axial distance where transmitter axis will intersect the receiver axis horizontally.
This distance is the Half Skip Distance (HSD) with reference to the probe position. Using the axial distance
to weld (HSD) and the thickness of the sample, the beam angle can be calculated using following relation:

The corresponding frequency to generate the calculated beam angle can be configured using the setup
guide in this application sheet. Both probes can now be positioned at a distance between Half Skip and
Full Skip to provide complete coverage of weld zone in the vertical.

Figure 3: Configuration-1 Transmitter and Receiver Held Together Side-by-Side


Note:

For better sensitivity to the defects, the angle between Transmitter and Receiver should be kept
small (Max 30 degrees).

AS-SH-B13

Page 11 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


3.4. Equipment Configuration-2 (Tandem)
In this configuration Transmitter and Receiver Probes is placed in tandem facing the weld as shown in the
Figure-3. The slide ruler of the probe fixture 160A0071 can be used to hold the probes at a fixed distance to
each other. The receiver probe is always positioned in front of the transmitter at a Full Skip Distance (FSD).
The probes can be configured for thru-transmission across the weld or can be configured on either side of
the weld looking for reflections from the defects in the weld. The minimum distance between transmitter and
receiver can be 3 inches (76.2mm). For any desired beam angle and the thickness Tk the Transmitter
and Receiver Separation can be calculated by:

Figure 4: Configuration-2 Transmitter and Receiver in Tandem

For convenience to the users the beam angles are calculated for all the possible thicknesses keeping a
fixed separation of 3 inches (FSD) between transmitter and receiver. The calculated data is provided in the
following table:

AS-SH-B13

Thickness

Beam Angle

Separation between
Transmitter and Receiver

1.0

56.30

1.5

45.00

2.0

36.87

2.5

30.96

Page 12 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT

Note:

User can still use any beam angle using a fixed separation. In those cases the receiver will not be
at optimal position (FSD) to receive the directly transmitted waveform but would be able to receive
the reflected or diffracted energy from a defect.
Depending upon the particular test conditions if user selects to position transmitter and receiver at
different separation distance (other than 3 inches), the Beam angle for FSD can be calculated as:

For a given beam angle, the frequency of excitation can be calculated as:

Refer to Setup Guide for Frequency and Beam Angles.


Due to the size constraints of the probe, the minimum separation between transmitter and receiver
can be 3 inches only for probe 274A0121.
The tandem probe 274A0201 has fixed separation (1.266) between transmitter and receiver.
For a given material thickness, as the separation between transmitter and receiver (FSD) changes
the corresponding beam angle would also change to ensure receiver remains at one FSD distance
from the transmitter.
Considering large beam width the user will still be able to use any angle even if receiver is not
positioned at optimum FSD.
Avoid reflections from the back-edge. For size constrained areas of inspection where back edge
reflections interfere with the signals from the weld zone, it is recommended to use Configuration-1
(Transmitter and Receiver side-by-side) or tandem probe.
The position of receiver with reference to the weld can be between Half Skip and Full Skip to
provide complete coverage of weld zone in the vertical axis.
The signal first received by receiver can be used for calibration and is called Direct Transmit
Signal.
Instrument display in A-scan or B-scan mode only provides information about the Sound Path
Distance. The results should be interpreted accordingly.
Configuration-2 or Tandem configuration provides better sensitivity to defects as compare to
Cofiguration-1 or Side-by-Side configuration.

AS-SH-B13

Page 13 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


3.5. Setup Guide

Material

Aluminum

Thickness

Up to
125mm

Carbon Steel

Up to
125mm

Stainless Steel

Up to
125mm

Beam
Angle

Frequency
MHz

40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90

0.778
0.707
0.652
0.610
0.577
0.552
0.532
0.518
0.508
0.502
0.500
0.778
0.707
0.652
0.610
0.577
0.552
0.532
0.518
0.508
0.502
0.500
0.759
0.690
0.637
0.596
0.563
0.538
0.519
0.505
0.495
0.490
0.488

Tuning Module

Standard Setup File

LP-R-600 kHz
1
SP-R2-0.250-500 kHz

AL-SH-AB-707 kHz

LP-R-600 kHz
1
SP-R2-0.250-500 kHz

CS-SH-AB-707 kHz

LP-R-600 kHz
1
SP-R2-0.250-500 kHz

SS-SH-AB-707 kHz

1.
SP-R2-0.250-500 kHz is used with Probe 274A0201 and LP-R-600 kHz is used with Probe
274A0121.
NOTE:

To inspect any other material contact Innerspec Technologies.


All setup files are configured for 45 degree angle. To generate other angles change frequency as per
the Setup Guide.
Calculate and position probes at optimum distance from the weld as explained in probe configurations
(Tandem or Side-by-Side).
o
Beam angles below 20 degrees are not practically possible due to the presence of stronger grating
lobes as compare to the actual beam.

AS-SH-B13

Page 14 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


Setup Parameters:

Setup File

Frequency and Timing

Signal Conditioning

Material

AL-SH-AB-707 kHz

Frequency 707 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 200 us
Gate 1 Start / Range 25 us / 25 us
Gate 2 Start / Range 55 us / 100 us

Gain 10 dB
Coincidence Filter 3
Averaging 4
FIR Filter 0.4 to 0.8 MHz

Aluminum

CS-SH-AB-707 kHz

Frequency 707 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 200 us
Gate 1 Start / Range 25 us / 25 us
Gate 2 Start / Range 55 us / 100 us

Gain 10 dB
Coincidence Filter 3
Averaging 4
FIR Filter 0.4 to 0.8 MHz

Carbon Steel

SS-SH-AB-707 kHz

Frequency 707 kHz


Tone Bursts 4 Cycles
Data Window 200 us
Gate 1 Start / Range 25 us / 25 us
Gate 2 Start / Range 55 us / 100 us

Gain 10 dB
Coincidence Filter 3
Averaging 4
FIR Filter 0.4 to 0.8 MHz

Stainless Steel

These parameters are included in the pre-configured standard Setup Files. These configurations can be
modified to optimize the results on different applications. The types of modifications include:

Increase averaging to improve signal to noise


Increase number of cycles (max to 5 cycles) to penetrate thick and attenuating materials
Adjust Gain to amplify or attenuate received signals on the display screen.

Look the temate PowerBox H Manual for details on the operation of the equipment.

AS-SH-B13

Page 15 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


3.6. Operation
3.6.1. Inspection Procedure

Connect Sensors, Signal Conditioning box and Power Box H.


Insert corresponding tuning module in Signal Conditioning Box slot.

Power on temate PowerBox H


Configure EMAT probes using Configuration-1 or Configuration-2, considering size constrains of the
inspection area.
OPEN to load the standard Setup File for your application (see Setup Guide).
The setup files are configured for frequency to generate 45 degree beam, which needs to be amended
as per your application.
Calculate inspection parameters (Beam Angle, Frequency and Half Skip distance) based on Sensors
Configuration and Material Thickness.
Modify the configuration file as per your needs.
Gate-2 can be used as flaw gate to receive reflected signals from a flaw. The amplitude of signal can be
plotted against the relative position of the probe in scan axis.
Adjust Gate-2 Start and Range as per the application.
The vertical position of the Gate 2 on the screen will determine the threshold level for alarm purposes.
The built-in setup files do not include automatic Alarm Thresholds, which should be set by the user.
Select the display preference (A, B, C Scans or strip chart). If strip is selected, set Strip 1 to G2 (Amp).
Press the Start/Stop button to start inspection in manual mode on your samples and move sensors in
a scan pattern for the desired coverage.
In Manual Mode the data will not be position encoded. For position encoded data, the encoder must be
connected with the instrument and probe.
For encoder setup refers to the Position Encoded Line Scan Setup.

Sample Scan A-Scan, Strip and B-scan View


3.6.2. Line Scans

Mount Encoder (PN 281A0002) to Fixture/Probe and connect to instrument.


Select DAQ tab and check Trigger Source to Encoder.
Select Axis1(X/Scan) and edit Start to 0, Stop to 500 (length of scan in mm) and Pitch to 12 units
(assuming the units selected are mm). Encoder PN 281A0002 provides a pulse or tick every 0.25 mm,
therefore a pitch of 12 implies that each sample will be taken at 3mm intervals.
The pitch of the encoder defines the distance between 2 samples or triggers generated by the external
encoder. The user is free to select any desired pitch suitable for the application.

AS-SH-B13

Page 16 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Shear Horizontal Angle Beam with EMAT


3.6.3. Encoder Calibration

The encoder supplied by Innerspec technologies is already calibrated by default and no calibration is
needed. The encoder supplied by Innerspec Technologies provides a tick every 0.25mm.
In case user wants to integrate a different encoder, the following procedure should be adopted to
calibrate the encoder.
Press 0 besides Set button and Edit ENCODERS CAL Position to any value (e.g. 200 mm) and
start the device. Pulsing will start as soon as the encoder starts moving. Confirm that the X-position
display in the status bar is 0.
Move the encoder by the value chosen (e.g. 200 mm) and press Set. The reading below Set should
display 0.xx mm/tick (User should know the distance per tick for the type of encoder used). It should
not be a zero value. If value is zero repeat the calibration process.
Stop pulsing. The encoder is calibrated and is ready to scan.

3.6.4. Scanning with Encoder

Start pulsing and wait for X-position display to go to 0 in the status bar. Normally a message will flash
that Wait while device is preparing for Scan. After this message the device is ready for scan
movement.
Move the probe and encoder. The A-scan or strip-chart/b-scan should update as the encoder moves
forward.
On strip chart mode, moving forward will update new values, reversing the direction will repaint the
trace backwards. This feature is interesting if during scan a part of the sample wasnt read correctly, or
to confirm response from a certain area. Press stop when finished.
Every time user stops pulsing and restarts, the x-scan will be reset to 0 and will be treated as a new
scan.

AS-SH-B13

Page 17 of 17

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

EUROPE
ASIA
AMERICAS
Innerspec Technologies, Inc. Innerspec Technologies Europe, S.L. Innerspec Technologies China, LLC.
Avenida Madrid km. 27.2, nave 8
Building #15, 333 Qington Rd.
4004 Murray Place
28802 Alcal de Henares, SPAIN
Shanghai, 201203, CHINA
Lynchburg, VA 24501, USA
Tel:
+34-918-776-369
Tel/Fax: +86-(0)21-50177535
Tel: +1-434.948.1301
Fax: +34-911-881-344
www.innerspec.com/cn
Fax: +1-434.948.1313
www.innerspec.com/eu
www.innerspec.com

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


temate MRUT
Application Sheet
Rev. AS-CD-D13

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.


All Rights Reserved
This Material May Not Be Published, Rewritten,
or Redistributed Without Express Permission

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

Table of Contents
1. Guided Waves and EMAT.......................................................................................................................... 3
2. Modes of Operation.................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1. Attenuation Mode ............................................................................................................................... 4
2.2. Reflection Mode .................................................................................................................................. 4
3. Equipment Options..................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1. Instrumentation ................................................................................................................................... 5
3.2. Sensors .............................................................................................................................................. 5
3.3. Permanent Magnets ........................................................................................................................... 5
3.4. RF Coils .............................................................................................................................................. 6
3.5. Compliance Spring Foam ................................................................................................................... 6
3.6. Signal Conditioning Box ..................................................................................................................... 6
3.7. Cables ................................................................................................................................................ 7
3.8. Encoder .............................................................................................................................................. 7
3.9. Sensor Fixtures .................................................................................................................................. 8
3.9.1. Roller Kit assemblies.................................................................................................................... 8

3.9.2. temate MRUT Hand-Held Scanner ............................................................................................ 9

4. temate PowerBox H. Configuration, Setup and Operation .................................................................... 11


4.1. Equipment Configurations ................................................................................................................ 11
4.2. Setup Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 12
4.2.1. Dispersion Curves ...................................................................................................................... 15
4.3. Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 23
4.3.1. Attenuation Mode (Pipe Axial Scanning) ................................................................................... 23
4.3.2. Reflection Mode (Pipe Circumferential Scanning) ..................................................................... 25
4.3.3. Automatic Alarms and Thresholds ............................................................................................. 26
4.3.4. Line Scans ................................................................................................................................. 27

AS-CD-D13

Page 2 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


1. Guided Waves and EMAT
Introduction
Guided Wave Testing is a Non-Destructive Testing
technique method that employs ultrasonic stress
waves that propagate along a structure while guided
by its boundaries. Guided waves permit covering
long distances from a single point with a limited
number of sensors, making it very effective for rapid
scanning of pipelines and tanks.
On relatively thin structures, it is possible to
generate volumetric guided waves that fill up the
material and permit a complete, volumetric
inspection. The most common types of volumetric
waves are Shear Horizontal (SH) and Lamb. This
Application Sheet covers the inspection with EMATgenerated Lamb waves.
Lamb waves travel throughout the material with both
vertical and forward motion in an elliptical pattern.
These waves are dispersive by nature, and very
sensitive to thickness variations. They can be
classified in symmetric (a.k.a. longitudinal) and
asymmetric (a.k.a. flexural) modes. The introduction of boundary conditions makes Lamb wave
problems inherently more difficult than the more conventional bulk waves. Unlike the finite number of
modes present in a bulk wave problem, there are an infinite number of modes associated with a given
Lamb wave application. That is, a finite body can support an infinite number of different Lamb wave
mode modes.
Guided waves can be used to cover distances ranging from a few millimeters to tens of meters. The two
most common techniques for in-service inspections with guided waves are Long Range UT (LRUT) and
Medium Range UT (MRUT). This application covers exclusively MRUT:
o LRUT. Used almost exclusively for pipeline inspection in reflection mode to cover long
distances (tens of meters) from a fixed ring of sensors. It normally works with low frequencies
(sub-100kHz). Typical detection capabilities are 10% of cross-sectional wall loss.
o MRUT. Used in both attenuation and reflection mode to cover shorter distances (0.1-5m). The
sensors are mounted on scanners to inspect long stretches of pipe or tanks. It typically works
with frequencies from 100kHz to 1MHz, and can detect small pits (x10 more sensitivity than
LRUT).
Characteristics
Direction of Propagation: Parallel to the entry wall and within the boundaries of the top and bottom
walls. Even though they can be generated in structures 25mm (1) thick, they are mostly used on
materials that do not exceed 13mm (0.5) thick when looking for internal flaws.
Sensor Configuration: Pulse-Echo or Pitch-Catch.
Wave modes: Lamb waves 50kHz to 10MHz.
Materials Inspected: Ferromagnetic and non-ferromagnetic metals.
Applications
Corrosion detection on materials <0.5 or 13mm thick. Thicker materials can be inspected with a
significant decrease in performance.
EMAT Uniqueness
Dry and non-contact (up to 2.5mm lift-off depending on frequency and type of application).
Not affected by surface conditions. Capable of inspecting on rough and through thin coatings.
Less sensitive to sensor positioning and angle.
Very good frequency selectivity due to its meander-coil design and tone-burst excitation. This
permits greater versatility in choosing the most appropriate mode for the application.

AS-CD-D13

Page 3 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


2. Modes of Operation
This guided wave technique for corrosion detection supports two modes of operation:
2.1. Attenuation Mode
Used to inspect pipes by scanning axially along their lengths, or plates/tanks between the sensors. This
mode is typically used in Pitch-Catch, although Pulse-Echo can be used on small diameter pipes (<6 or
150mm).

A transmitter and a receiver are used to track the echoes received in a direct transmission (S1) and
wrap around (S2).
Corroded walls cause Time-Of-Flight shifts and decreases in amplitude.
Time-Of-Flight shifts are caused by velocity changes when traveling through the thinner portion of
the pipe.
Decreases in amplitude are caused by energy loss reflected from corroded areas.

Attenuation of the Signal due to Corrosion and Other Defects


2.2. Reflection Mode
Used to inspect pipes by scanning around their circumference, or plates and tanks by scanning 0.1-5m in
front of the sensors. This mode is typically used in Pulse-Echo, but it can also be used in Pitch-Catch.

Pulse-Echo or Pitch-Catch sensor configuration, sending sound in front of the sensors and looking
for reflections. In Pitch-Catch configuration, the first signal picked up by the receiver can be used
for normalization.
Reflection form an indication will come later in the time domain.

Reflections from Corrosion and Other Defects


.

AS-CD-D13

Page 4 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


3. Equipment Options
3.1. Instrumentation
Innerspec offers two instruments especially designed for this application:

temate PowerBox H with PowerUT H software. Hand-Held and battery operated for spot
measurements and manual scanning.

temate PowerBox 2 with temate PowerBox MP (Magnet Pulser) and PowerUT software. For

automated or semi-automated inspection. Compatible with the temate Navigator automated scanner.

This Application Sheet covers exclusively inspection with temate PowerBox H. For detailed Technical
Specifications for each instrument, visit our website or contact Innerspec Technologies.
3.2. Sensors
Innerspec offers Lamb wave sensors with permanent magnet and electromagnet sensors. Pulsed
electromagnets permit scanning without attracting the part and can increase signal-to-noise ratio in some
circumstances but require the use of a separate magnet pulser and needs to be plugged to an external
power supply. Inspection setups and coils for both pulsed and permanent magnets are identical.
3.3. Permanent Magnets
Separate permanent magnet probes and RF Coils (Sensor = Probe + RF Coil) are a versatile and economic
alternative to have solutions for multiple applications with minimum investment.

Part Number

274A0244
Large L
(Replaces
274A0107 &
274A0144

274A0093M00
XXL
(metric)

274A0107
274A0144*
Large L

Magnet
Type
Permanent
High-Temp
200C
Magnet

Guided Wave
Type

Magnetic
Field

Dimensions

Applicable
Instrument

Lamb/Surface

Normal

temate
PowerBox H
PowerBox 1
PowerBox 2

Normal

temate
PowerBox H
PowerBox 2

Integrated
Wheel Kit

Permanent
2x2

Lamb/Surface

Permanent
1 x 1 face

Lamb/Surface

Normal

temate
PowerBox H
PowerBox 2

(Discontinued)

Other

Supports all
connectorless RF
Coils.

Fastening:
4 ea.M5
38.1mm
square
pattern

Optional
Roller Kits
and
Encoder for
scanning

High Temperature: (200C)

Permanent Magnet Probes Can Create


Very Powerful Magnetic Fields
Handle With Care

AS-CD-D13

Page 5 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


3.4. RF Coils
See Setup Guide for a list of coils available for the application. For a more complete list of coils, see the
Catalog of Sensors & Accessories for EMAT Applications.
3.5. Compliance Spring Foam
Compliance spring foam is used to maintain flexible RF coils close to the part. The foam is engineered to
maintain its shape in dirty or wet environments and apply very low pressure on the coil to minimize wear.
Part
Number

Description

Order Quantity

Magnets

001V0014

1/8 Gray Foam for Permanent


Magnets

24 x 24 Sheet

274A0107

001F0404

Shaped White Foam for XXL


Permanent Magnets

Unit

274A0093-M00

001V00015

High-Temperature Foam (200C)

2 x 7 Strip

274A0144
274A0244

3.6. Signal Conditioning Box

The temate PowerBox H (PBH) can use two Signal Conditioning Boxes. Signal Conditioning Box PN
279A0010 is mounted directly on the PBH without the need for additional cables. PN 245A0132 is used
when the sensors are located at more than 2m from the instrument and requires additional cables.
Both Signal Conditioning Boxes have sockets to insert custom tuning modules.
Part
Number

Type &
Frequency

245A0132*

2 Channel
Pitch-Catch
Pulse-Echo
Angled Beam &
Guided Waves
(includes 2
slots for Tuning
Modules)

279A0010

Signal
Conditioning
1 Channel
Pitch-Catch
Pulse Echo
Angled Beam &
Guided Waves

Probes &
Sensors

274A0244
274A0093
-M00
274A0107
274A0144

274A0244
274A0093
-M00
274A0107
274A0144

Minimum
Cables
Required

1 Channel
1-232A0411
1-232A0412
1-232A0123
2 Channel
232A0580

Connector
Instrument

Connector
Probe

4-2 Pin Lemo 0B


2-BNC
2-Triax
2-6 Pin Lemo 1B

2 or 4-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

4.25 x 6.77 x 2.50


108mm x 172mm x 64mm
Mounting Holes
2.36 x 7.18 (60mm x
182mm)

2-2 Pin
Lemo 0B
1-232A0123
Or
1-232A0580

Not Applicable
(snap-on
Module)

(includes 1 slot
for Tuning
Module)

Dimensions

19 Pin
Lemo 2B
Type K Mini

4.16W x 4.48D x 3.63H


105mm x 114mm x 92mm

Requires external power supply

AS-CD-D13

Page 6 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


3.7. Cables & Adapters
Necessary to connect the RF Coils to the Signal Conditioning Box.
Part
Number

Length

Connector
Instrument

Connector
Signal Cond.
Box

Connector
Coil

Instrument

Description

232A0123

6
(182cm)

NA

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

PowerBox H, 2

1 Channel (2 Pin) RF Coil Cable


For 274A0107/144 + Coils

232A0580

6
(182cm)

NA

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-6 Pin
Lemo 0B

PowerBox H, 2

1 Channel (2 Pin) RF Coil Cable


For 274A0093-M00 + Coils

232A0411

Up to 50m

2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-Triax

NA

PowerBox H, 2

1 Channel Transmit Cable for


long distances and Ext. Signal
Conditioning Box

232A0412

Up to 50m

2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-BNC

NA

PowerBox H, 2

1 Channel Transmit Cable for


long distances and Ext. Signal
Conditioning Box

211M0001

Up to 50m

NA

1-2 Pin
Lemo 1B

NA

NA

Signal Conditioning Box Power


Supply

3.8. Encoder
Encoder is selected to be integrated seamlessly with the appropriate sensor.
Part
Number

Description

Connector

281A0002

Encoder
Cable Length: 2m
Resolution: 4p/mm -100ppi

Lemo
FGG.2B.319.CLAD62Z

AS-CD-D13

Page 7 of 27

Probes

Instrument

274A0107
274A0144

temate
PowerBox H

Picture

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


3.9. Sensor Fixtures
3.9.1. Roller Kit assemblies
Roller-Kit assemblies are recommended for scanning ferromagnetic parts with Permanent Magnet Probes.
Part
Number

Description

Probes

187A0001

4-Wheel Roller Kit for Permanent Magnet Probes

274A0107
274A0144

187A0003

Front-Rear and Side Roller Kit for Large Permanent


Magnet Probes
(used for axial scanning of tubes and rounds)

274A0107
274A0144

AS-CD-D13

Page 8 of 27

Picture

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

3.9.2. temate MRUT Hand-Held Scanner

The temate MRUT Hand-Held Scanner provides Axial and Circumferential scanning for inspection of
pipes and plates using guided waves that cover 1-5 meters (Medium Range UT). This system can utilize
both permanent and pulsed magnets.

Part Number

Description

Lamb
(Permanent Magnets)

SH
(Permanent Magnets)

Lamb
(Pulsed Magnets)

800A0163

Axial and
Circumferential
Scanner

2x 274A0093-M00
(See section 5.2.3.6 for
coils)

274A0169(T)
274A0170(R)

2x 274A0076-M00
(See section 5.2.3.6 for coils)
Requires 2x XXXXX

3.9.2.1. Axial Scanning Technique


Guided wave attenuation technique is used to inspect flat, convex (e.g. pipe ID) or concave surfaces (e.g.
pipe OD). Sound is sent between sensors (2 paths on pipes). This system uses SH or Lamb Wave Modes
with permanent or pulsed magnets.
Axial Scanner

Extension Arm

Minimum OD Inspected

Small/None

48mm

4-102mm

Medium

123mm

6-152mm

Large

200mm

24-610mm

AS-CD-D13

Page 9 of 27

Minimum ID Inspected
48-1219mm

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


3.9.2.2. Circumferential Scanning Technique
Guided wave reflection technique to inspect flats or tubes. Sound is sent along the plate or tube and reflects
from defects ahead or behind the sensors. Purchased assembly includes the dual sensor configuration for
operation in Pitch-Catch and Pulse-Echo (single sensor) modes. SH wave operation is only available in
Pitch-Catch mode. SH and Lamb Wave Modes can be generated with permanent or pulsed magnets.
Circumferential Scanner

Minimum OD
Inspected

4 102mm

Part Numbers (SH and Lamb Wave Technique)


SH Wave

Sensors: 274A0169(T) / 274A0170(R)


Scanner: 800A0163

Lamb Wave

Magnet: (2) x 274A0093-M00 (See 7.2.3.6 for coils)

Pulsed SH Wave

Magnet: (2) x 274A0119 (See 5.2.3.6 for coils)

Scanner: 800A0188

Pulsed Lamb Wave

Magnet: (2) x 274A0076 (See 5.2.3.6 for coils)

Magnet Pulser:
245A0156

AS-CD-D13

Page 10 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

4. temate PowerBox H. Configuration, Setup and Operation


4.1. Equipment Configurations
The system can be used with either the Large magnets (274A0244) and corresponding coils, foam and
cables (PN 232A0123), or the XXL magnets (274A0093-M00) and corresponding hourglass coils, foam
and cables (PN 232A0580). Both types of magnets can be used in either Pulse-Echo or Pitch-Catch
T/R cable
232A0123
Thermocouple Receive
or
Cable (for
Not Used
Pitch-Catch) 232A0580

6
(182cm)

NA

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

1-2 Pin
Lemo 0B

Encoder

All

1 Channel (2 Pin) RF Coil Cable


For 274A0107 + Coils

Large Magnet Configuration in Pulse-Echo mode with 2-Pin Coil

XXL Magnet with temate MRUT Hand-Held Scanner and 6-Pin Hourglass Coil

AS-CD-D13

Page 11 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


4.2. Setup Guide
The general setup for Lamb wave inspection includes:

Selection of appropriate mode for the thickness using dispersion curves. Innerspec has developed
software that generates dispersion curves and suggests the most appropriate mode and coil for a
particular application (Guided Wave Analysis Tool or GWAT).
Selection of coil and tuning module based on the wavelength and frequency suggested by GWAT.
Adjustment of the instrument based on the frequency selected and velocity of the particular mode.

In this Application Sheet we have selected coils, sensors and tuning module for thicknesses ranging from
0.08 to 0.5 (2mm-13mm) for carbon steel. The tuning modules are selected for PN 274A0244 magnet for
thicknesses ranging from 0.08-0.19 (2mm-5mm). Magnet XXL PN 274A0093-M00 is used for thicknesses
ranging from 0.23-0.5 (4mm -13mm). The setup file names have the following information.
CD-A0-T02-0.080-865kHz
Application
Lamb Wave Mode
Thickness
Wavelength in inches
Frequency

For each thickness two setup files have been generated for A0 and S1 modes with the exception of 0.080
(2 mm). For 0.080 (2 mm) S1 mode is not available.
Each setup can be used in Pitch-Catch or Pulse-Echo mode by using the corresponding tuning module.

thickness
inch/mm

Probe 274A0244
plus
RF Coil Options

Wavelength
inch

Wave
Mode

Standard Setup File

Tuning Module

0.08/2

T/ R-L-M-0.120x5-1.000 (-CL)

0.120

A0

CD-A0-T02-0120-865kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.120-1000kHz
PE-011

T/R-L-M-0.200x4-1.000 (-CL)

0.200

A0

CD-A0-T03-0200-507kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.200-500kHz
PE-012

T/R-L-M-0.160x5-1.000 (-CL)

0.160

S1

CD-S1-T03-0160-1400kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.160-1250kH
PE-008

T/R-L-M-0.250x4-1.000 (-CL)

0.250

A0

CD-A0-T04-0250-405kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.250-400kHz
PE-012-LF or PE-013-LF

T/R-L-M-0.200x4-1.000 (-CL)

0.200

S1

CD-S1-T04-0200-1126kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.200-2000kHz
PE-008

T/R-L-M-0.300x3-1.000 (-CL)

0.300

A0

CD-A0-T05-0300-342kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.300-300kHz
PE-013-LF

T/R-L-M-0.250x4-1.000 (-CL)

0.250

S1

CD-S1-T05-0250-891kHz

L/SE-PC-M-0.250-800kHz
PE-009-LF

0.12/3

0.15/4

0.19/5

AS-CD-D13

Page 12 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


thickness
inch/mm

274A0093-M00
plus
RF Coil Options

Wavele
ngth
inch

Wave
Mode

Standard Setup File

Tuning Module

T/R-ME-M-0.250x5-2.000

0.250

A0

CD-A0-T04-0250-405kHz

ME-PC-M-0.250-400kHz
PE-010-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.200x6-2.000

0.200

S1

CD-S1-T04-0200-1126kHz

ME-PC-M-0.200-1000kHz
PE-006

T/ R-ME-M-0.300x4-2.000

0.300

A0

CD-A0-T05-0300-342kHz

ME-PC-M-0.300-300kHz
PE-009-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.250x5-2.000

0.250

S1

CD-S1-T05-0250-891kHz

ME-PC-M-0.250-800kHz
PE-007

T/R-ME-M-0.400x4-2.000

0.400

A0

CD-A0-T06-0400-251kHz

ME-PC-M-0.400-250kHz
PE-012-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.250x5-2.000

0.250

S1

CD-S1-T06-0250-866kHz

ME-PC-M-0.250-800kHz
PE-007

T/R-ME-M-0.520x3-2.000

0.520

A0

CD-A0-T07-0520-187kHz

ME-PC-M-0.520-150kHz
PE-012-LF

T/ R-ME-M-0.300x4-2.000

0.300

S1

CD-S1-T07-0300-727kHz

ME-PC-M-0.300-650kHz
PE-008

T/R-ME-M-0.520x3-2.000

0.520

A0

CD-A0-T08-0520-194kHz

ME-PC-M-0.520-150kHz
PE-012-LF

T/ R-ME-M-0.400x4-2.000

0.400

S1

CD-S1-T08-0400-560kHz

ME-PC-M-0.400-500kHz
PE-008

T/R-ME-M-0.640x2-2.000

0.640

A0

CD-A0-T09-0640-158kHz

ME-PC-M-0.640-150kHz
PE-013-LF

T/ R-ME-M-0.400x4-2.000

0.400

S1

CD-S1-T09-0400-548kHz

ME-PC-M-0.400-500kHz
PE-008

T/R-ME-M-0.640x2-2.000

0.640

A0

CD-A0-T10-0640-159kHz

ME-PC-M-0.640-150kHz
PE-013-LF

T/ R-ME-M-0.520x3-2.000

0.520

S1

CD-S1-T10-0520-433kHz

ME-PC-M-0.520-400kHz
PE-009-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.720x2-2.000

0.720

A0

CD-A0-T11-0720-140kHz

ME-PC-M-0.720-125kHz
PE-013-LF

T/ R-ME-M-0.520x3-2.000

0.520

S1

CD-S1-T1-0520-426kHz

ME-PC-M-0.520-400kHz
PE-009-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.720x2-2.000

0.720

A0

CD-A0-T12-0720-143kHz

ME-PC-M-0.720-125kHz
PE-013-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.640x2-2.000

0.640

S1

CD-S1-T12-0640-353kHz

ME-PC-M-0.640-300kHz
PE-010-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.720x2-2.000

0.720

A0

CD-A0-T13-0720-145kHz

ME-PC-M-0.720-125kHz
PE-013-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.640x2-2.000

0.640

S1

CD-S1-T13-0640-349kHz

ME-PC-M-0.640-300kHz
PE-010-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.960x2-2.800

0.960

A0

CD-A0-T14-0960-104kHz

ME-PC-M-0.960-100kHz
PE-014-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.640x2-2.000

0.640

S1

CD-S1-T14-0640-343kHz

ME-PC-M-0.640-300kHz
PE-010-LF

T/R-ME-M-1.040x2-2.800

1.040

A0

CD-A0-T15-1040-096kHz

ME-PC-M-1.040-80kHz
PE-013-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.720-x2-2.000

0.720

S1

CD-S1-T15-0720-308kHz

ME-PC-M-0.720-500kHz
PE-010-LF

T/R-ME-M-1.040x2-2.800

1.040

A0

CD-A0-T16-1040-097kHz

ME-PC-M-1.040-80kHz
PE-013-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.800x2-2.500

0.720

S1

CD-S1-T16-0720-279kHz

ME-PC-M-0.800-280kHz
PE-011-LF

0.15/4

0.19/5

0.23/6

0.27/7

0.31/8

0.35/9

0.39/10

0.43/11

0.47/12

0.5/13

0.55/14

0.59/15

0.62/16

AS-CD-D13

Page 13 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


T/R-ME-M-1.120x2-2.875

1.120

A0

CD-A0-T17-1120-090kHz

ME-PC-M-1.120-110kHz
PE-014-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.880x2-2.500

0.880

S1

CD-S1-T17-0880-255kHz

ME-PC-M-0.880-250kHz
PE-011-LF

T/R-ME-M-1.120x2-2.875

1.120

A0

CD-A0-T18-1120-091kHz

ME-PC-M-1.120-110kHz
PE-014-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.880x2-2.500

0.880

S1

CD-S1-T18-0880-253kHz

ME-PC-M-0.880-250kHz
PE-011-LF

T/R-ME-M-1.120x2-2.875

1.120

A0

CD-A0-T19-1120-092kHz

ME-PC-M-1.120-110kHz
PE-014-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.960x2-2.800

0.960

S1

CD-S1-T19-0960-232kHz

ME-PC-M-0.960-220kHz
PE-011-LF

T/R-ME-M-1.120x2-2.875

1.120

A0

CD-A0-T20-1120-093kHz

ME-PC-M-1.120-110kHz
PE-014-LF

T/R-ME-M-0.960x2-2.800

0.960

S1

CD-S1-T20-0960-231kHz

ME-PC-M-0.960-220kHz
PE-011-LF

0.66/17

0.70/18

0.74/19

0.78/20

These files are valid for carbon steel only (use GWAT for other materials) and might need to be modified
depending on the environmental conditions of the inspection. The modifications can include:

Gain adjustments based on material attenuation (wrappings, coatings, liquids).


Coincidence filter to reduce random noise (and reduce PRF and speed).
Average filter to improve signal-to-noise (and reduce PRF and speed).
Number of cycles. Increase to improve signal strength, and reduce to improve axial resolution.
Positioning of gates.
Setup of automatic thresholds.
Band-pass filter parameters to improve signal-to-noise.

See the temate PowerBox H Manual for additional details on the operation of the equipment.

AS-CD-D13

Page 14 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

4.2.1. Dispersion Curves


The following are the dispersion curves for all the setups in this Application Sheet.

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-L-M-0.120x5-1.000 coil

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-L-M-0.160x5-1.000 coil

AS-CD-D13

Page 15 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-L-M-0.200x4-1.000 coil

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-L-M-0.250x4-1.000

AS-CD-D13

Page 16 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-L-M-0.300x3-1.000

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-ME-M-0.250x5-2.000 coil

AS-CD-D13

Page 17 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-ME-M-0.300x4-2.000

Dispersion Curves for T/R-ME-M-0.400x4-2.000

AS-CD-D13

Page 18 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-ME-M-0.520x3-2.000

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-ME-M-0.640x2-2.000

AS-CD-D13

Page 19 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-ME-M-0.720x2-2.000

Coil 800
1
A0
S0
A1
S1
S2
A2
A3
S3
A4
S4

0.9
0.8

Frequency (MHz)

0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0

10

12

14

16

18

20

Thickness (mm)
Dispersion Curves for T/R-ME-M-0.800x-2.500

AS-CD-D13

Page 20 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

Coil 880
0.8
A0
S0
A1
S1
S2
A2
A3
S3
A4
S4

0.7

Frequency (MHz)

0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0

Dispersion Curves for T/ R-ME-M-0.720x2-2.000

10

12

14

16

18

20

Thickness (mm)
Dispersion Curves for T/ R-ME-M-0.880x2-2.500

Coil 960
0.8
A0
S0
A1
S1
S2
A2
A3
S3
A4
S4

0.7

Frequency (MHz)

0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0

10

12

14

16

18

20

Thickness (mm)
Dispersion Curve for T/R-ME-M-0.960x2-2.800

AS-CD-D13

Page 21 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


Coil 1040
0.6
A0
S0
A1
S1
S2
A2
A3
S3
A4
S4

Frequency (MHz)

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

10

12

14

16

18

20

Thickness (mm)
Dispersion Curve for T/R-ME-M-1.040x2-2.800

Coil 1120
0.6
A0
S0
A1
S1
S2
A2
A3
S3
A4
S4

Frequency (MHz)

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

10

12

14

16

18

20

Thickness (mm)
Dispersion Curve for T/R-ME-M-1.120x2-2.875

AS-CD-D13

Page 22 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


4.3. Operation
Both Attenuation and Reflection modes can be performed in Pulse-Echo or Pitch-Catch configurations
(attenuation in Pulse-Echo only for small diameter tubes). For Pitch-Catch (PC) both transmitter and
receiver coils are needed. For Pulse-Echo (PE), the receiver coil is used both as transmitter and receiver.

The temate MRUT Hand-Held Scanner can only be used with XXL PN 274A0093-M00 magnet. To use
274A0244 magnet in Pitch-Catch mode the 187A0017 Bracket is needed.

The temate MRUT Hand-Held Scanner can be used with one, two or three body sections (including
center body), depending on the configuration. The three bodies are used for axial scanning on pipes greater
than 12.

To optimize the amplitude and minimize coil-wear when using the XXL magnets and temate MRUT
Hand-Held Scanner, turn on the system and lower the magnet/s using the cam-adjustment lever until the
coil is firmly pressed on the material and signal amplitude is maximum. Once the sensor is in full contact,
slowly raise the magnet with the lever until the signal is 95% of its maximum. Move the sensor with the
scanner to confirm that it can easily roll back and forth with consistent signal strength.
4.3.1. Attenuation Mode (Pipe Axial Scanning)

Determine the thickness of the material.


Select corresponding Transmitter and Receiver EMAT coils along with the recommended PC type
tuning module (see RF Coils Table), and attach to magnets.
Place the sensors on the part to be inspected.

Attach Signal Conditioning Box on top of temate PowerBox H.


Insert tuning module in the Signal Conditioning Box.
Connect Instrument with Signal Conditioning Box and Sensors. Use cable/s 232A0123 for Large
magnet, and 232A0580 for the 274A0244 and other XXL magnet/s.

Power on temate PowerBox H.


Press OPEN, to load the standard Setup File from the internal memory or from USB memory stick for
your application (see Setup Guide).
Confirm that External Signal Conditioning Box is selected in TX/RX Tab in the setup menus of

temate PowerBox H.
Confirm that there is sufficient distance between the transmitter and receiver coils so the received
signal is clearly separated from the initial burst (main bang).
Adjust Gate-1 (Calibration gate) Start and Range on the near signal. It is the first signal after the
main bang. Near signal would cover the shortest distance between the transmitter and receiver coils.
Adjust Gate-2 (Flaw) Start and Range on the far signal. The far signal would cover the longest
distance between the transmitter and receiver coils.
The vertical position of the Gate 2 on the screen can be adjusted by Thres(%) in Gates Tab.
The Setup files do not include Automatic Alarm Thresholds. The thresholds should be set by a qualified
inspector after the material has been properly calibrated with known defects.
For setting up Alarm Thresholds, refer to Setting Alarms and Thresholds.
Navigate to Display and ensure Views are set for A (50%) +Strip (50%).
Press Gates and ensure Strip1 set for G1 (Amp) and Strip2 set for G2 (Amp). For Time-Of-Flight
display the select G1 (TOF) and G2 (TOF)
Press MENU to switch off the menu screen with display maximized to show A-scan and Strip both.
The operator has the option to select any type of view or combination of views to visualize and record
output data. For Axial Scanning, the A-Scan + Line Scan is the recommended display to easily follow
up the variations against the baseline.
You are now ready to inspect.
Press the Start/Stop button to start inspection in manual mode, and move the sensors along the
scanning path.
In Manual Mode, the data will not be position encoded. For position encoded data, the encoder must be
connected with the instrument and probe (when encoder is not integrated).
For encoder setups, refer to the Position Encoded Line Scan Setup.

AS-CD-D13

Page 23 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves

Near Signal
Far Signal

Sample Screen showing both A-scan and Strip Chart data.

For single gate, through-transmission configuration, switch off Gate-1 and leave Gate-2 to monitor the
attenuation of the signal received. The maximum recommended distance for through-transmission
configuration is 24 (610 mm). Through-transmission configuration is useful for inspection of plates
where there is only one path from transmitter to receiver.

AS-CD-D13

Page 24 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


4.3.2. Reflection Mode (Pipe Circumferential Scanning)

Determine the thickness of the material.


Select corresponding Transmitter and Receiver EMAT coils along with the recommended PE type
tuning module (see RF Coils Table), and attach to magnets.
Place the sensors on the part to be inspected.

Attach Signal Conditioning Box on top of temate PowerBox H.


Insert tuning module in the Signal Conditioning Box.
Connect Instrument with Signal Conditioning Box and Sensors. Use cable/s 232A0123 for Large
magnet and 232A0580 for the 274A0244 and other XXL magnet/s.

Power on temate PowerBox H.


Press OPEN, to load the standard Setup File from the internal memory or from USB memory stick for
your application (see Setup Guide).
Confirm that External Signal Conditioning Box is selected in TX/RX Tab in the setup menus of

temate PowerBox H.
Gate-1 is not used in this setup and should not be selected.
Gate-2 is used to receive the reflections from the defects. In Pulse-Echo configuration, the same sensor
is used as transmitter and received. The coverage can vary from 1-5m depending on the attenuation of
the material.
The vertical position of the Gate 2 on the screen can be adjusted by Thres(%).
The Setup files do not include Automatic Alarm Thresholds. The thresholds should be set by a qualified
inspector after the material has been properly calibrated with known defects.
For visual purposes, the recommended display is A + B scan or A + Strip. Navigate to Display and
ensure Views are set accordingly.
Press Gates and ensure Strip1 set for G2(Amp)..
Press MENU to switch off the menu screen with display maximized.
You are ready to inspect.
Press the Start/Stop button to start inspection in manual mode and move sensors in front of the area
to be inspected. Set the range to determine the depth.
In Manual Mode the data will not be position encoded. For position encoded data, the encoder must be
connected with the instrument and probe.
For encoder setup refers to the Position Encoded Line Scan Setup.

Sample Scan - Pulse-Echo Mode in Strip and B-scan View

AS-CD-D13

Page 25 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


4.3.3. Automatic Alarms and Thresholds
This inspection can be performed with different display settings. The most common and convenient are A +
Strip and A + B Scan. The Measurement Bar must be set to Alarm from Display Tab. The threshold for
inspection validity and flaw must be carefully adjusted. The following procedure is demonstrated with
A(50%)+B(50%) view as the display option:

Press GATE and navigate to the Gate1 Menu. Adjust Gate 1 Parameters to select Threshold
(Alarm 1), Set Crossing to Validity and Amplitude Threshold to 20%. If Calibration or Direct Transmit
Signal drops below the amplitude threshold limit the inspection data becomes invalid and plotted with a
yellow color band in B-scan. The Alarm Measurement Bar would also indicate G1 Invalid with Yellow
color.
The automated Flaw Threshold Alarm can also be set when the defect amplitude crosses above a
preset threshold. Select Amp Threshold (Alarm2) under Gate 2 Parameters by selecting Gate 2
Menu ( button). Set the Max Amp Thres to the desired value (e.g., 15%) with Crossing set to
Above. This will ensure whenever a defect response exceeds the threshold, B-scan color will change
to RED.
Transmitter and Receiver probes can also be used with single path, through-transmission
configuration where Gate-1 can be switched-off and only Gate-2 can be used to monitor for any
attenuation to the signal received by the receiver. In this case the Transmitter and Receiver probes are
separated by a maximum distance of 24 (610 mm) to cover the desired area of inspection.
To detect attenuation of the received signal automatically, the Gate 2 Max Amp Thres should be
adjusted to the desired attenuation level (e.g., 30%) with Crossing set to Below. This will ensure that
when the received signal drops below the threshold, B-scan color will change to a RED band.

Sample Screens showing both A-scan and B-scan data.


Note:

In case of Strip Chart view the defect will only be indicated in Measurement Bar with Amplitude
Alarm on G2 changing color into RED. This failure indication will not be shown on the strip chart.
The Alarm output is also available from Input/output connector, which can be used to drive other
alarming devices like an audible or visible alarm.

AS-CD-D13

Page 26 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Corrosion Detection with Guided Waves


4.3.4. Line Scans

Mount Encoder (PN 281A0002) to magnets without integrated encoders and connect to instrument. The

temate MRUT Hand-Held Scanner and 274A0244 magnet have a built-in encoder that can be
attached to any of the body sections.
Place sensor with encoder on the part to be inspected.
Select View to display A Scan + Strip Chart or A scan + B scan.
Select the appropriate setup for Pitch-Catch or Pulse-Echo.
Select DAQ tab and check Trigger Source to Encoder.
Select Axis1(X/Scan) and edit Start to 0, Stop to 500 (length of scan in mm) and Pitch to 12 units
(assuming the units selected are mm). Encoder PN 281A0002 provides a pulse or tick every 0.25 mm,
therefore a pitch of 12 implies that each sample will be taken at 3mm intervals.
The pitch of the encoder defines the distance between 2 samples or triggers generated by the external
encoder. The user is free to select any desired pitch suitable for the application.

4.3.4.1. Encoder Calibration

The encoder supplied by Innerspec Technologies is calibrated from the factory and no additional
calibration is required. This encoder is designed to provide a pulse tick every 0.25mm.
For other encoders, follow this procedure:
o Press 0 besides Set button and Edit ENCODERS CAL Position to any value (e.g. 200 mm)
and start inspection. Pulsing will start as soon as the encoder starts moving. Confirm that the Xposition display in the status bar is 0.
o Move the encoder by the value chosen (e.g. 200 mm) and press Set. The reading below Set
should display 0.xx mm/tick (User should know the distance per tick for the type of encoder
used). It should not be a zero value. If value is zero repeat the calibration process.
o Stop pulsing. The encoder is calibrated and is ready to scan.

4.3.4.2. Scanning with Encoder

Start pulsing and wait for X-position display to go to 0 in the status bar. Normally a message will flash
Wait while device is preparing for Scan. After this message the device is ready for scanning.
Move the sensor and encoder. The A-scan, Strip Chart or B Scan should update as the encoder moves
forward.
On Strip chart mode, moving forward will update new values, reversing the direction will repaint the
trace backwards. This feature is interesting if during scan a part of the sample wasnt recorded
correctly, or to confirm a response from a certain area. Press stop when finished.
The x-scan will be reset to 0 and will be treated as a new scan, every time pulsing stops.

AS-CD-D13

Page 27 of 27

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Introduction to PowerBox H

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Table of Contents

Innerspec Technologies, Inc.


Company
Products & Services
temate PowerBox H
Standard Applications for temate PowerBox H
temate PowerBox H Software Overview

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Innerspec Technologies

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Our Company
US company located in Lynchburg VA with offices in Europe and China,
and representatives and distributors throughout the world
56 patents for NDT applications and equipment
First EMAT (NASA) in 1989. First commercial EMAT in 1994
World leader in High-Power Ultrasound and EMAT with over 200 integrated
systems installed in 25 countries, and the most complete line of standard
equipment
temate and Rollmate product lines

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Innerspec Technologies provides advanced NDT inspection


products and services for field and factory operation
Products & Services:
Integrated systems for
inspection of welds, tubes, rolls,
rods, billets, strip and plates and
many other application specific
solutions
High-Power ultrasonic
instrumentation
Standard EMAT & Specialty
Piezoelectric Sensors and
Accessories
Specialized In-Service solutions
Research & Development

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

In 2011, Innerspec introduced the temate PowerBox H,


the most powerful handheld UT instrument in the market
temate PowerBox H

Design Goals
Capable of running any
EMAT sensor including bulk
waves (normal, angled) and
guided waves (Lamb, SH,
Rayleigh)
Capable of running PVDF,
PZT and air-Coupled

1 Channel tone burst (up to 5 cycles) with 8kW of power in two


power settings (600Vpp and 1200Vpp)
100kHz to 6MHz Bandwidth
Pulse/Echo and Pitch/Catch operation
Built in pulse/echo signal conditioning for 1.5-3MHz
Signal conditioning attachment with independent tuning modules
to adapt to any type of coil configuration

Capable of multiplexing up
to 8 sensors, EMAT and
non-EMAT sensors

1:8 Multiplexer attachment with slot for tuning module


Tuning Modules permit matching any transducer including EMAT,
PZT (PVDF), air-coupled

Software and hardware


features available in highend flaw detectors

Handheld and battery


operated

A, B, C and Line Scan formats


Amplitude, TOF and velocity readouts
3 Gates (Calibration, Flaw, Backwall)
DAC Curves
PC software to display and analyze results
Remote control operation through Ethernet
Optional software modules for Stress, Bolt Load and multi-channel
measurements

6 Lbs (2.7 Kgs)


4-8 hours of battery time

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H System without and with Signal


Conditioning Attachment/Multiplexer

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Standard Applications
for temate PowerBox H

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

The applications all require and take advantage of the


high-power instrumentation
UT Type

Wave Type

Applications

Normal Beam

Angled Beam

Shear Horizontal for austenitic weld inspection


Shear Horizontal for 30-90 inspections (e.g. weld overlays)
Shear Vertical for high and low temperatures, coated, rough

Guided Waves

Corrosion detection with Shear and Lamb waves


Surface inspections (strip, rolls, tubes, billets, weld
overlays)
Thin weld inspection (under 6mm)

Multi-Sensor
Normal Beam

Normal Beam
Flexible

Thin-profile, flexible, dry-coupled sensors


Scanning, dry-coupled wheel

EMAT

Piezoelectric

Normal Beam &


Angled Beam
Normal Beam
Air-Coupled

Thickness Measurement
High and low temperatures (-30C to 650C)
Coated, painted and rough surfaces (3-4mm lift-off)
Flaw and corrosion detection and measurement

Stress/anisotropy measurement
Bolt-load with single and double wave mode (L and SH)
Nodularity measurements
Corrosion monitoring (8 Channel BAND)

PZT transducers for highly-attenuative materials (forgings,


castings, plastics, composites, fiberglass
Honey-comb, ceramics, composites with air-coupled
transducers (under development)

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

10

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

While Piezoelectric UT uses a crystal to generate the


ultrasound, an Electro Magnetic Acoustic Transducer
(EMAT) generates the sound in the part inspected

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

11

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT can be used on most metals and geometries for all


the standard UT applications

Type of Inspection
Flaw Detection
Points (1D)
Seams (2D)
Surfaces (2D)
Volumes (3D)
Thickness &
Distances
Material Properties
Stress/Anisotropy
Nodularity
R-Value

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

Material

Geometries

Electrical
Discrete and
Conductors
Continuous
Ferrous: Carbon
Geometries
Steel, Stainless
Plates (thin and
Steel, Nickel,
thick)
Cobalt
Cylinders, Rods
Non-Ferrous:
Tubes (round,
Aluminum, Copper,
square or others)
Brass, Uranium and
Structural Elements
most other metals

12

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

EMAT enjoys all the benefits of UT plus other particular


advantages
Ultrasonic Te chnique

Volumetric Inspection
One-Side Access
Meets UT Standards
Safe

Ultrasound is Generated in the Part Inspected


Dry Inspection
(no couplant)

Insensitive to
Surface Conditions

Easier Probe
Deployment

Easy to Automate
and Integrate in
Production
No Couplant
Induced Errors
High Inspection
Speeds (up to 60
m/s)
Capable of High and
Sub-Zero
Temperatures

Capable of
Inspecting Rough,
Dirty (Oily/Wet),
Oxidized or Uneven
Surfaces

No Signal Variations
from Probe to Probe
Small Changes in
Probe Angle do not
Affect Results (e.g.
part curvature)

Unique Wave Modes

Capable of
Generating
Horizontally
Polarized Shear
Wave Energy
Guided Waves
(Especially
Advantageous for
Weld Inspection)

Challenges
More Power Required

Lower Signal-to-Noise

Larger Sensors

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

13

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Some of the applications for temate PowerBox H


System are

Normal Beam
Angle Beam
Guided Wave
Material Property Measurement

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

14

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Normal Beam Standard Equipment with temate


PowerBox H

Thickness Measurement

Normal Beam

High Temp Spot


temate PowerBox H Kit
(US/EU)

800A0165/6

Scanning
800A0165/6

Flaw Detection

Corrosion
Monitoring

Thin (<100mm) Thick (>100mm)

Sensor Array

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

Signal Multiplexing

NA

NA

NA

NA

279A0009

Sensors/Magnets (S/M)

S - 274A0165/190

M - 274A0107/144

M - 274A0107/144

M - 274A0107/144

160A0085/160A0086

Roller Kit/ Sensor Fixture

NA

187A0003

187A0003

187A0003

NA

Handle

187A0007

NA

NA

NA

Cable EMAT

232A0123

232A0123

232A0123

232A0123

NA

Thermocouple

281A0001

NA

NA

NA

Included

Encoder

NA

281A0002

281A0002

281A0002

NA

RF Coils

NA

Tuning Module

NA

NA

NA

NA

Wear Surface

NA

510V0005

510V0005

510V0005

NA

Software

NA

NA

NA

NA

400S0014

Comments

Up to 650C

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

PE-L-S-0.730-0.250 PE-L-B-0.726-0.492 PE-L-B-1.208-0.942

NA

Scanning up to 200C with 274A0144 (80C with 107)

NA
NA

8-Channels Multiplexed

15

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Angled Beam Standard Equipment with temate


PowerBox H
SH Wave

SV Wave

Austenitic Welds

Non-Austenitic Materials

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

Angled Beam EMAT


temate PowerBox H Kit
(US/EU)
Signal Conditioning

279A0009

279A0009

Sensors/Magnets (S/M)

S - 274A0201

S - 274A0107/144

Roller Kit/ Sensor Fixture

160A0071

Handle

NA

NA

Cable EMAT

232A0123 x2

232A0123 x2

Thermocouple

NA

281A0001

Encoder

NA

281A0001

RF Coils

Included

Tuning Module

LP-R-600 kHz

R-L-M-0.060x12-1.000, R-L-M-0.070x10-1.000, R-L-M-0.080x8-1.000,


R-L-M-0.100x7-1.000, R-L-M-0.120x5-1.000, R-L-M-0.140x6-1.000, R-L-M-0160x5x1.000,
L/SE-PE-M-0.060-3500, L/SE-PE-M-0.070-3000, L/SE-PE-M-0.080-2600,
L/SE-PE-M-0.100-2000L/SE-PE-M-0.120-2000, L/SE-PE-M-0.140-1500, L/SE-PE-M-0.160-1250

Wear Surface

510V0005

510V0005

Software

400S0006 (BEAM)

400S0006 (BEAM)

Comments

0-90

30-50

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

16

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Guided Wave Standard Equipment with temate


PowerBox H
Shear Waves
Guided Waves

Any Thickness

Lamb Type Waves


Volumetric
(0.5mm-12mm)

0-3mm Weld
Inspection

Surface Waves

temate PowerBox H Kit


(US/EU)

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

Signal
Conditioning/Multiplexer

279A0010

279A0010

279A0009

Sensors/Magnets (S/M)

Transmit: S 274A0169
Receive: S 274A0170

M - 274A0107 x2 (x1 for Pulse Echo)

M - 274A0107

Roller Kit/ Sensor Fixture

NA

187A0003 x2 (x1 for Pulse Echo)

Tube Scanner

Circ: 800A0163 Axial: 800A0164

Circ: 800A0163 Axial: 800A0164

NA

Cable EMAT

232A0123 x2

232A0123 x2 (x1 for Pulse Echo)

232A0123 x2

Encoder

281A0002

281A0002

281A0002

800A0165/6

187A0003

RF Coils

Included

See App. Sheet

Tuning Module P/C

XLP-R-250 kHz

See App. Sheet

NA

Tuning Module P/E

NA

See App. Sheet

L-PE-MF-280A0199

Wear Surface

510V0005/6

510V0005/6

510V0006

Software

400S0002 (GWAT)
Non-Leaky Wave Mode

Comments

Corrosion & Flaw in Plates,


Tubes

280A0199

400S0002 (GWAT)
Leaky, Highly
Sensitive Mode

400S0013

Surface & Near


Surface

Corrosion & Flaw in Plates, Tubes

Focused Angled for


Point Defects
Focused Straight for
Planar Defects

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

17

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Properties Measurement Standard Equipment with


temate PowerBox H
Properties
Measurement

Normal Beam (0)


Stress

Bolt Load

Nodularity

temate PowerBox H Kit


(US/EU)

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

800A0165/6

Multiplexer

279A0009

279A0009

279A0009

Sensors

274A0157

274A0158

274A0158

Handle

187A0007

187A0007

187A0007

Cable EMAT

232A0169

232A0169

232A0169

Thermocouple

NA

281A0001

281A0001

Tuning Module

NA

PZT 274A0158

PZT 274A0158

Wear Surface

NA

035A0020

035A0020

Add. Software Required

400S0008

400S0009

400S0010

Comments

Dual Coil

Shear & Long. Modes

Shear & Long. Modes

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

18

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H
Software Overview

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

19

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H

temate PowerBox H
Utilizes a easy to navigate GUI
Easy to recognize conventional
icons for folder navigation and
file management
Industry standard nomenclature

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

20

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H Main Screen

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

21

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H system tab

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

22

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H general tab

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

23

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H TX/RX Tab

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

24

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H DSP/GATES tab

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

25

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H DAQ tab

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

26

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H Display tab

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

27

5/6/2013

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

temate PowerBox H Help tab

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

28

1 9

1 0 8 3

_ M

a c r o s

Thank You
for your attention

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.

29

10

AMERICAS
Innerspec Technologies, Inc.
4004 Murray Place
Lynchburg, VA 24501, USA
Tel: +1-434.948.1301
Fax: +1-434.948.1313
www.innerspec.com

EUROPE
Innerspec Technologies, S.L.
Avenida Madrid km. 27.2, nave 8
Polgono Las Matillas
28802 Alcal de Henares, SPAIN
Tel: +34-918-776-369
Fax: +34-976-362-193
www.innerspec.com/eu

ASIA
Innerspec Technologies, LLC.
Building #15, 333 Qingtong Rd.
Shanghai 201203, CHINA
Tel/Fax: +86-(0)21-50177535
www.innerspec.com/cn

www.innerspec.com

temate PowerBox H
Operations Manual
Rev. TPBH-OM-G13

2013 Innerspec Technologies, Inc.


All Rights Reserved
This Material May Not Be Published, Rewritten,
or Redistributed Without Express Permission

Page 1 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual

Table of Contents
1. General Description .................................................................................................................................... 4
2. Applications ................................................................................................................................................ 5
2.1. Advantages of EMAT .......................................................................................................................... 5
2.2. Wave Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 6
2.3. Standard Applications ......................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.1. EMAT Applications ....................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.2. Piezoelectric Applications ........................................................................................................... 12
3. Technical Specifications, Dimensions and Connectors ............................................................................ 13
3.1. Technical Specifications.................................................................................................................... 13
3.2. Pulser Performance .......................................................................................................................... 14
3.3. Input / Output Connector ................................................................................................................... 15
4. Equipment at a Glance ............................................................................................................................. 16
4.1. What is in the Box ............................................................................................................................. 16
4.2. Instrument Overview ......................................................................................................................... 16
5. Power and Battery .................................................................................................................................... 19
5.1. Power ON/OFF and Power Save ...................................................................................................... 19
5.2. System Reset .................................................................................................................................... 19
5.3. System Restore ................................................................................................................................. 20
5.4. Charging the Battery ......................................................................................................................... 20
6. Navigation and File Management ............................................................................................................. 21
6.1. Navigation ......................................................................................................................................... 21
6.2. Shortcut Keys .................................................................................................................................... 23
6.3. Saving and Recalling Files ................................................................................................................ 24
6.4. File Management .............................................................................................................................. 26

7. PowerUT H Software .............................................................................................................................. 27


7.1. Quick Reference ............................................................................................................................... 27
7.1.1. Measurement Bar Options .......................................................................................................... 28
7.1.2. Measurement Cursors View Area ........................................................................................... 29
7.1.3. SYSTEM Menu Tab .................................................................................................................... 30
7.1.4. GENERAL Menu Tab ................................................................................................................. 31
7.1.5. TX/RX Menu Tab ........................................................................................................................ 32
7.1.6. DSP/Gates Menu Tab ................................................................................................................ 33
7.1.7. DAQ Menu Tab ........................................................................................................................... 34
7.1.8. DISPLAY Menu Tab ................................................................................................................... 35
7.1.9. HELP Menu Tab ......................................................................................................................... 36
7.2. Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................. 37
7.2.1. Technique Set Up (TX/RX) ......................................................................................................... 37
7.2.2. Magnet Setup ............................................................................................................................. 38
7.2.3. Filters and Gates (DSP/GATES) ................................................................................................ 39
7.2.4. Measurements and Alarms......................................................................................................... 40
7.2.5. Strip Chart Options ..................................................................................................................... 42
7.2.6. Calibration and Running Modes (DAQ) ...................................................................................... 43
7.2.7. Encoder Setup (DAQ) ................................................................................................................. 44
7.2.8. Calibrate Thermocouple ............................................................................................................. 45
7.2.9. Calibrate Velocity, and Temperature Correction ........................................................................ 46
7.2.10. Display (DISPLAY) ..................................................................................................................... 47
7.2.11. Overlaying DAC Curves on A-Scan (DAQ) ................................................................................ 48
7.2.12. Generating C-Scan ..................................................................................................................... 49
8. PowerBox H Input Output Panel ............................................................................................................... 51
8.1. Setting-Up IO Panel .......................................................................................................................... 51
8.2. Input Output Connector ..................................................................................................................... 52
9. Software Upgrades ................................................................................................................................... 53
10. PC Viewer Software.................................................................................................................................. 54

11. temate PowerBox H Remote Data Acquisition ....................................................................................... 55


12. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................................ 57
TPBH-OM-G13

Page 2 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
13. Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................. 58
14. Accessories .............................................................................................................................................. 59
14.1. Signal Conditioning and Multiplexing Attachments ........................................................................... 59
14.2. Encoders, Thermocouple, Batteries and Other Accessories ............................................................ 59
15. Limited Warranty....................................................................................................................................... 60
16. Contact Information .................................................................................................................................. 61

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 3 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
1. General Description

The temate PowerBox H is a hand-held, battery operated ultrasonic instrument capable of generating
spikes and tone bursts up to 1200V or 8kW of peak power in frequencies ranging from 100kHz to 6MHz.
The equipment can be used in pulse-echo (same transmitter and receiver) and pitch-catch (different
transmitter and receiver) operation. For pulse-echo operation, a built-in transmitter/receiver switch permits
connecting sensors directly to the instrument with no additional hardware. A built-in thermocouple port
permits taking temperature readings to correct Time-Of-Flight measurements, and a one-axis encoder input
can be used for integration with an automated or manual scanner. The instrument can be used with
sensors from Innerspec Technologies or other manufacturers to generate bulk waves (normal and angle
beam) and guided waves. A setting of 600Vpp (4pprox.. 3kW) is also available to maximize battery life if
the application does not require full power.

Embedded software PowerUT H permits the user to modify the triggering and receiving patterns, use
advanced filters to enhance signal-to-noise and present the information on A, B, C and Line Scan formats.
Screen captures, device settings and data can be downloaded to a PC using additional software provided
with the instrument.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 4 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
2. Applications

The temate PowerBox H is designed to drive sensors that require a very high-power instrument with toneburst capabilities such as EMAT, air coupled, and other high-performance piezoelectric transducers.
2.1. Advantages of EMAT
EMAT or Electro Magnetic Acoustic Transducer is an Ultrasonic Testing (UT) technique that generates the
sound in the part inspected instead of the transducer.
An EMAT induces ultrasonic waves into a test object with two interacting magnetic fields. A relatively high
frequency (RF) field generated by electrical coils interacts with a low frequency or static field generated by
magnets to generate a Lorentz force in a manner similar to an electric motor. This disturbance is
transferred to the lattice of the material, producing an elastic wave. In a reciprocal process, the interaction
of elastic waves in the presence of a magnetic field induces currents in the receiving EMAT coil circuit. For
ferromagnetic conductors, magnetostriction produces additional stresses that enhance the signals to much
higher levels than could be obtained by the Lorentz force alone. Various types of waves can be generated
using different combinations of RF Coils and Magnets.

Because the sound is generated in the part inspected instead of the transducer, EMATs have the following
advantages over more conventional piezoelectric transducers:

Dry inspection. EMATs do not require couplant for transmitting sound, which makes them very well
suited for inspection of hot parts, and integration in automated environments.
Impervious to surface conditions. EMATs can inspect through coatings and are not affected by
pollutants, oxidation or roughness.
Easier probe deployment. Not having wedges or couplant, Snells law of refraction does not apply,
and the angle of the probe does not affect the direction of propagation. This makes them easier to
control and deploy, especially in automated environments.
Ability to generate unique wave modes. EMATs are the only practical means for generating shear
waves with horizontal polarization (SH waves), which do not travel through low-density couplants.
The ability to easily produce Guided SH waves and lamb waves make EMAT ideal for generation of
guided waves, used in the inspection of plates, tubes and rounds.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 5 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
2.2. Wave Modes
EMAT is capable of generating all wave modes used in ultrasonic testing, including some modes that are
very difficult or impractical with conventional piezoelectric transducers.
The table below provides a summary guide of the type of wave and technique available for different
applications.

Bulk/Guided

Beam
Orientation

Wave
Mode

Technique

Longitudinal

Piezo
EMAT

Shear
Horizontal

EMAT

Shear
Vertical

Piezo
EMAT

Shear
Horizontal

EMAT

- Flaw Detection,
including austenitic
materials

Rayleigh

Piezo
2
EMAT

- Flaw Detection (surface)

Lamb

Piezo
2
EMAT

- Flaw (including
Corrosion) Detection
- Velocity and Properties
Measurements

Shear
Horizontal

EMAT

Normal

Bulk

Angled

Surface

Guided

Main
Applications

- Thickness and Velocity


Measurements
- Flaw Detection
- Properties Measurement

- Flaw Detection

Volumetric

1
2

TPBH-OM-G13

- Flaw (including
Corrosion) Detection
- Velocity and Properties
Measurements

Generation restricted to EMAT for practical purposes


Especially well-suited for generation with EMAT

Page 6 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
2.3. Standard Applications
For EMAT applications, Innerspec Technologies offers sensors that can generate nearly any type of wave
mode and used for hundreds of applications. The available wave modes include:

Normal Beam (0); Shear Horizontal and Longitudinal.


Angled Beam (0 to 90); Shear Horizontal and Shear Vertical.
Guided waves (90); Rayleigh (surface), Shear Horizontal and Lamb.

The most common EMAT applications are:

Normal Beam, including:


o Measurement of thickness and flaw detection at very high and very low temperatures.
Innerspec offers normal beam (0) sensors capable of inspecting parts at up to 1000C and
-50C. Check Application Sheet AS-NB-A11 for details.
o Scanning of plates, tanks, pipes and vessels for corrosion monitoring.
Flaw and Corrosion Detection, including:
o Shear Horizontal Angled Waves. Permit inspection of austenitic materials.
o Guided Waves (Shear Horizontal, Surface and Lamb Waves)
Thin Weld Inspection using Lamb Waves. Permits inspection of welds from 0.5mm to 3mm with
extremely high levels of detection and repeatability.
Corrosion Monitoring, including:

o Multi-channel temate BAND.


Material Properties Measurement, including:
o Measurement of residual stress with linearly polarized Shear Horizontal Normal Beam
waves.
o Measurement of Bolt-Load using dual mode Shear and Longitudinal waves.
o Measurement of Nodularity using dual mode Shear and Longitudinal waves.

The tables below shows the equipment required for each application.
Application Sheets are available from Innerspec Technologies, and new ones are created often. Check
www.innerspec.com for the latest information and news.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 7 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
2.3.1. EMAT Applications
2.3.1.1. Standard Bulk and Guided Wave Applications
Std. Bulk and Guided Wave Applications - Equipment Guide

Applications
Normal Beam

Angled Beam

Guided Waves

SPOT

SCN

SH

SV

SW

LP

TH/W

IWW

temate PowerBox H

279A0010

Signal Conditioning Box

279A0009

Multiplexer Attachement (1:2 & 1:8)

187A0007

High-Temperature Sensor Handle

281A0001

Thermocouple

187A0017

Large Magnet Bracket (274A0244)

800A0163

MRUT- Hand-Held Scanner

Instrumentation & Accessories


800A0165/66

MRUT/TH MRUT/TK

Connecting Cables
232A0123

2 to 2 Pin RF Coil Cable - 6'

232A0580

2 to 6 Pin RF Coil Cable - 6'

232A0169

6 to 6 Pin RF Coil Cable - 6'

232A0710

2 to 3 Pin RF Coil Cable - 6'

232A0306

16 to 16 Pin RF Coil Cable - 6'

x2

Wear Surfaces
510V0006

Guided Waves, Angled Beam Wear Surface 200C

High-Temperature Spot Probes


274A0125

High-Temperature Butterfly with Active Cooling (450C)

Cable 232A0123 Required

274A0126

High-Temperature Spiral with Active Cooling (450C)

Cable 232A0123 Required

274A0285

High-Temperature Spiral w/o Active Cooling (650C with Ring)

Cable 232A0710 Required

274A0190

High-Temperature Butterfly w/o Active Cooling (650C)

Cable 232A0123 Required

Angled Beam (SH) Probes


274A0203

Single-Channel SH Wave Sensor - S (80C)

274A0201

Single-Channel SH Wave Sensor - M (80C)

x2

274A0168

Single-Channel SH Wave Sensor - L (80C)

x2

274A0222/23

Single-Channel SH Wave Sensor - XL (80C)

x2

Permanent Magnets
274A0244

Permanent Magnet Probe - Large (200C)

274A0093-M00 Permanent Magnet Probe - XXL (80C)


Accessories Kit

800A0200

Normal Beam Accesssories Kit

800A0201

Shear Vertical Accessories Kit

800A0202

Surface Wave Accessories Kit

800A0205

Inspection While Welding Accessories Kit

800A0204

Thin Weld Inspection Accessories Kit

800A0195

Accessories Kit for Hand-Held MRUT with XXL Magnet

800A0199

Accessories Kit for Hand-Held MRUT with XXL & L Magnets

800A0208

Accessories Kit for Hand-Held MRUT with L Magnet

800A0203

Lamp Post Accessories Kit

SCN-Scanning, SH-Shear Horizontal, SV-Shear Vertical, SW-Surface, MRUT/TH-MRUT Thin, MRUT/TK-MRUT Thick, LP- Lamp Post, TH/W-Thin Weld, IWW-Inspections While Welding

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 8 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
2.3.1.2. Other Applications
Applications

Bolt Load

Normal Beam
Stress Measurement

Health Monitoring

Other Applications - Equipment Guide


Instrumentation & Accessories
800A0165/66

temate PowerBox H

279A0010

Signal Conditioning Box

279A0009

Multiplexer Attachement (1:2 & 1:8)

187A0007

High-Temperature Sensor Handle

281A0001

Thermocouple

Connecting Cables
232A0123

2 Pin RF Coil Cable - 6'

232A0169

2 to 6 Pin RF Coil Cable - 6'

232A0306

16 to 16 Pin RF Coil Cable - 6'

Wear Surfaces
035A0020

Dual Wave (L/SH) Sensor Wear Surface

High-Temperature Spot Probes

274A0157

Dual Polarization for Stress Measurement

274A0158

Dual Wave (L/SH) Sensor Small

274A0279

Dual Wave (L/SH) Sensor Large

High-Temperature Corrosion Monitoring (Normal Beam, Guided Wave)


Under Dev.

BAND(ST) - Standard

Cable 232A0580 Required

Under Dev.

Under Dev.

BAND(HD) - High-Density

Cable 232A0306 Required

Under Dev.

Under Dev.

BAND(GW) - Guided Waves

Cable 232A0306 Required

Under Dev.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 9 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
2.3.1.3. Standard Coils Compatibility Chart
Applications

Standard Coils - Compatibility Chart


Kit Part Numbers

Normal Beam

Angled Beam

SPOT

SCN

SH

NA

800A0200

NA

SV

Guided Waves
SW

800A0201 800A0202

MRUT/TH MRUT/TK
800A0208 800A0195

LP

TH/W

IWW

800A0203 800A0204 800A0205

800A0199

Normal Beam Coils


PE-L-S-0.730-0.250-CL

Normal Beam RF Coil (200C)

PE

PE-L-B-0.726-0.492-CL

Normal Beam RF Coil (200C)

PE

PE-L-B-1.208-0.942-CL

Normal Beam RF Coil (200C)

PE

Large Permanent Magnet Meander Coils


PE

280A0199-CL

Thin Weld Inspection Coil

T-L-MF-0.024x15-0.680-5.000R

Focused Meander Coil (200C)

PE

T-L-MF-0.032x12-0.715-5.000R

Focused Meander Coil (200C)

PE

T-L-M-0.060x12-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

R-L-M-0.060x12-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

T-L-M-0.070x10-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

R-L-M-0.070x10-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

T-L-M-0.080x8-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

R-L-M-0.080x8-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

T-L-M-0.100x7-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

R-L-M-0.100x7-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

T-L-M-0.120x5-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

R-L-M-0.120x5-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

T-L-M-0.140x6-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

R-L-M-0.140x6-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

T-L-M-0.160x5-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

R-L-M-0.160x5-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

T-L-M-0.180x5-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-L-M-0.180x5-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-L-M-0.200x4-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

PC

R-L-M-0.200x4-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

PE

T-L-M-0.250x5-2.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

PC

R-L-M-0.250x5-2.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

PE

T-L-M-0.300x4-2.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

PC

R-L-M-0.300x4-2.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

PE

T-L-M-0.400x4-2.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-L-M-0.400x4-2.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-L-M-0.500x2-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-L-M-0.500x2-1.000-CL

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

PC
PE

PE
PC

PE

PE
PC

PE

PE
PC

PE
PE

PE
PC

PC

PE

PE

PC
PE
PE

PE
PC

PC

PC

PE

PE

PE

XXL Permanent Magnet Meander Coils


T-ME-M-0.200x6-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-0.200x6-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-0.250x5-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-0.250x5-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-0.300x4-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-0.300x4-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-0.400x4-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-0.400x4-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-0.520x3-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-0.520x3-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-0.640x2-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-0.640x2-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-0.720x2-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-0.720x2-2.000

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-0.800x2-2.500

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-0.800x2-2.500

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-0.880x2-2.500

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-0.880x2-2.500

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-0.960x2-2.800

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-0.960x2-2.800

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-1.040x2-2.800

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-1.040x2-2.800

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

T-ME-M-1.120x2-2.875

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PC

R-ME-M-1.120x2-2.875

Meander RF Coils (200C)

PE

PE

PE

SCN-Scanning, SH-Shear Horizontal, SV-Shear Vertical, SW-Surface, MRUT/TH-MRUT Thin, MRUT/TK-MRUT Thick, LP- Lamp Post, TH/W-Thin Weld, IWW-Inspections While Welding
Pulse Echo Mode

PE

Pitch-Catch Mode

PC

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 10 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
2.3.1.4. Standard Tuning Modules Compatibility Chart
Applications

Standard Tuning Modules - Compatibility Chart

Normal Beam
SPOT

Kit Part Numbers

NA

Angled Beam

SCN

SH

800A0200

NA

SV

Guided Waves
SW

800A0201 800A0202

MRUT/TH MRUT/TK
800A0208 800A0195

LP

TH/W

IWW

800A0203 800A0204 800A0205

800A0199

Pulse Echo Tuning Modules


PE-002

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE-004

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE-005

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE-006

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE-007

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE-008

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE-009

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE-010

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE-011

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE-012

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE-009-LF

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE-010-LF

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE-011-LF

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE-012-LF

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE-013-LF

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE-014-LF

Pulse Echo Tuning Module

PE
PE
PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE

PE
PE
PE

PE

PE

PE
PE

PE
PE
PE
PE

PE

Pitch-Catch Tuning Modules - Large Permanent Magnets


L/SE-PC-MF-0.024-5000kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-MF-0.032-3500kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.060-2000kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.080-1500kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.100-1250kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.120-1000kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.140-900kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC
PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.160-750kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

L/SE-PC-M-0.160-1250kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

L/SE-PC-M-0.180-700kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.200-500kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.200-1000kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

L/SE-PC-M-0.200-2000kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

L/SE-PC-M-0.250-400kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

L/SE-PC-M-0.250-800kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

L/SE-PC-M-0.300-300kHz
L/SE-PC-M-0.300-700kHz

PC
PC

PC

PC
PC

PC

PC

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

PC

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.400-200kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.400-500kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

L/SE-PC-M-0.500-200kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

Pitch-Catch Tuning Modules - XXLarge Permanent Magnets


ME-PC-M-0.200-1000kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.250-400kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.250-800kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.300-300kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.400-250kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.400-500kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.520-150kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.520-400kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.640-150kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.640-300kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.720-125kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.720-500kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.800-280kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.880-250kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.960-100kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-0.960-220kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-1.040-80kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

ME-PC-M-1.120-110kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module

PC

Other Pitch-Catch Tuning Modules


SP-R2-0.250-500 kHz

Pitch-Catch Tuning Module - SH

PC

SCN-Scanning, SH-Shear Horizontal, SV-Shear Vertical, SW-Surface, MRUT/TH-MRUT Thin, MRUT/TK-MRUT Thick, LP- Lamp Post, TH/W-Thin Weld, IWW-Inspections While Welding
Pulse Echo Mode

PE

Pitch-Catch Mode

PC

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 11 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
2.3.2. Piezoelectric Applications
UNDER DEVELOPMENT

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 12 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
3. Technical Specifications, Dimensions and Connectors
3.1. Technical Specifications

Specifications temate PowerBox H


Part Number
Ultrasonic Channels
Bandwidth
Pulse Repetition Rate

RF Pulser

Receiver

P/R Modes

temate Powerbox H

A/D Converters
Filtering
Rectification

1
100kHz to 6MHz
Up to 300 Hz
Spike, Toneburst Waveforms
8 kW Power Output
1200Vpp @ 25App into 50 Ohms
0.1% Maximum Duty
Pulse-Echo Mode
1 k Input Impedance
30 dB to 70 dB Gain
<0.05 dB Gain Resolution
Pitch-Catch Mode
50 Input Impedance
-20 dB to 60 dB Gain
<0.1 dB Gain Resolution
Pulse-Echo, Pitch-Catch
12-bit, 100MHz
FIR Digital Filters
Full-wave, +/- half-wave, and RF mode

Evaluation Gates

Interface plus 2 Gates


Amplitude and Time Measurements

Encoder Interface

A/B Quadrature

PC Communication
Software
Connectors
Operating Temperature
AC Power Input

Other I/O

temate Powerbox H with Snap-on


Module

245A0183

USB MiniAB
Drag-n-drop

PowerUT H with A, B, C and Line


Scans plus PC Interface Software
Lemo EGG.0B.302.CLL
Lemo EGG.2B.319.CLL
0C (32F) to 40C (105F)
100-240VAC, 50-60Hz
Magnet Pulser Trigger
Thermocouple Input (Type K)
General Purpose I/O (5V TTL)
Encoder/Signal Cond. Power
VGA output
Ethernet 10/100
SD Card
8W x 9H x 4T

Dimensions
203mm x 229mm x 100mm
Weight
Battery Life

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 13 of 61

2.71Kgs (6lbs)
4-8 Hours

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
3.2. Pulser Performance
The chart below provides the pulser performance at a wide range of frequencies, and typical output at
1.5MHz.
Output power Vs Frequency
1400

1200

1000

Vout p-p

800
Vout p-p
600

400

200

0
50

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000

Khz

Typical output currents and voltages 8Kw RF pulser at 1.5Mhz

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 14 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
3.3. Input / Output Connector

The temate PowerBox H includes a 19 pin Lemo connector to provide power to external signal
conditioning boxes, and communicate with two-axis encoders and other external devices (2 inputs and 2
outputs). The drawing below provides information on this connector.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 15 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
4. Equipment at a Glance
4.1. What is in the Box

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Instrument
AC Power Supply
Hard Shell Carrying Case
Verification Block (Not Shown)
14.4 V DC Battery (Not Shown)
USB Adapter (Not Shown)
SDHC Card (Not Shown)
USB Memory Stick (Not Shown)

4.2. Instrument Overview

The temate PowerBox H consists of two main parts:

Basic Platform. Includes the PC with the Graphical User Interface software, LCD screen, data
entry keyboard, and input/outputs for ancillary devices.
Cartridge. Attaches to the back of the Basic Platform, and includes the high-power pulser/receiver,
the fast speed DSP board with D/A and A/D converters, and the signal input/ ports.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 16 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual

Front View

1
3
2
5

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Screen
Data entry keyboard
Scroll wheel
Harness anchor points
Hand band

Side View
1

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

TPBH-OM-G13

SD Card Port
MiniUSBPort
VideoPort
NetworkPort
AC PowerPort

Page 17 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual

Top View
2
3

1. Battery access.
2. TEMP. Thermocouple port.
3. RX. Receive connector for pitch-catch operation (requires separate
Signal Conditioning Box Module PN 279A0010).
4. T/R. Transmit/Receive connector for pulse-echo operation, or
Transmit connector for pitch-catch operation.
5. I/O. Input/Output connector for encoders and other devices.
6. Sound port (Not Used).

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 18 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
5. Power and Battery
5.1. Power ON/OFF and Power Save
The instrument can operate from the battery, and/or when connected directly to the grid with the included
power supply. To operate from the grid, connect the instruments AC/DC power pack to the DC power jack.
When DC power is connected, the green DC LCD will turn and stay on.
Power ON

Press Power button until the red POWER LED turns on (approximately 2 seconds).
The instrument will first display a splash screen for 10 seconds, then the update/failsafe window for
another 20 seconds. The software application should appear within 45 seconds after pressing
power button.
The red MEMORY BUS ACTIVITY LED will blink during the boot-up process. It shows that the
operating system is loading.

Power OFF with Automatic Saving of Setup Files

Press and hold the power button for two seconds. A beep will be heard prior to the shutdown.
Release button immediately after the beep.
The system will save all the current setups to the default configuration file. During next Power On
all the setups done prior to shut down will be available. It is still recommended to use the SAVE
function to save setups. The SAVE function will save and permit assigning new names to
configuration files.
If a file was saved in the Ram drive, it will prompt to save on the hard drive.

Power Save

Pressing the power button once will shut down the LCD. The software is still running but if an
acquisition was running it will stop.
Pressing the power button once again will cancel Power Save mode and LCD will illuminate again.
On the System tab, when TIMERS control is enabled:
o The Efficiency Mode Time is the countdown to dime out the LCD to 15 % of its maximum
brightness.
o Auto-shutdown is the countdown to automatically shut-down the device.
o The Efficiency Mode and Auto-Shutdown countdown is reset as soon as a key is
pressed.

5.2. System Reset


Soft Reset

Press the X button 3 times in a row within 1 second. This will close the software and user will lose
all the existing configuration setups which are not saved to a configuration file. The software will restart after reset. In some outstanding circumstances the application might need to be re-installed.
To do so, do the following:
o Turn OFF the device, and re-start. Keep left arrow pressed to enter update menu.
o Select the Uninstall Application menu option. This opens up another file menu with a

single entry PowerBox H. Press SEL in the keypad to navigate to the Uninstall button
in the GUI. Press OK after selecting Uninstall.
o Go back to the Main Update menu using the MENU button in the GUI.
o Select Install Cartridge menu option and press OK. This step installs the software
application for the cartridge. At the end of this step, a Done message appears along with a
Start Application button.
o The software is fully updated. You may start the application or turn OFF the device.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 19 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
Hard Reset

If the software has crashed and screen is frozen, reboot the device as follows:
o Press and hold the power button for 5-6 seconds.
o When the red power LED goes off, release the power button.
o Press the power button again to boot the device.

Software Re-Installation
o

If a soft or hard reset do not work, proceed with a full re-installation of the software (see 9.
Software Upgrades for detailed instructions).

5.3. System Restore


If resetting the equipment or trying to install new software fails, a system restore might be needed. To
restore the equipment, proceed as follows:

Shutdown the device. Wait until the red LED power goes off.
Prepare the restore file on an USB drive. Contact support at Innerspec Technologies for restore
file if not available.
The file must be located in the root directory of the USB drive (not into a subfolder).
Press and hold the Power button for at least 10 seconds. The system must go through TWO
complete full power cycles (the red power LED will turn on, then after 5 seconds it will turn off, 5
seconds later it will turn on again). After two power cycles, release power button.
Follow the step on the screen. The system restore will erase all the data on the hard drive and
reinstall the OS.
After completion reboot the device and install the latest PBH software again.
If the problem persists, contact Innerspec Technologies for additional support.

5.4. Charging the Battery

Charging starts immediately as soon as the DC power pack is connected, whether the application is
running or not. If the application is not running, the battery will charge completely within 2 hours.
During charging, the orange CHARGE LED stays on.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 20 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
6. Navigation and File Management
6.1. Navigation
Navigation is normally performed using the keypad and scroll wheel. An external USB keyboard and
mouse can also be used for this purpose.
Activating Menu and Views

To show or hide the menu, press MENU.


If menu is visible, the SEL key will cycle through VIEW 1 (top), VIEW 2 (bottom view, if available)
and MENU.
The item selected will have a purple outline. If enabled, the RULERS of a selected view will also
switch to a white background.

Navigating Tabs and Parameters inside Tabs

Press MENU, or navigate to the menu bar using SEL key.


Use LEFT and RIGHT arrows to move from tab to tab.
Use scroll wheel to move up and down inside a tab and highlight parameters.
Use OK key, to select a parameter inside the tab.
Once a parameter has been selected, use scroll wheel or keyboard inputs to change values and/or
move up and down to cycle through the various parameters.
Some parameters will modify results in real time, and others will not. Press OK key to confirm the
new value and move to other items. Pressing OK on check boxes will also toggle the state of the
check box (active or not).

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 21 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
Editing Values Alpha-Numeric Field

All editable fields once selected for editing, their background color will change to blue. After making
changes the user presses OK and the background color reverts back to its original color.
Any character can be selected using Alpha-Numeric keypad. For example F2 key pressed once
will input 2, but when pressed twice will input value A. Similarly user can input values B and C
by pressing the same key three or four times in quick succession.
All special characters can be selected by repeatedly pressing F1 key.
The decimal value or dot can be selected by pressing F1 key three times in quick successions.
The space can be selected by pressing ZERO key twice.

Editing Values Numeric Field Only

Some editable fields will only accept numeric values.


User can select any value from 0 to 9 from the keypad. However decimal value cannot be selected
from the keypad directly.
The decimal value can be selected by pressing F1 or 1 key twice in quick succession.
Another way to enter decimal values can be :
First enter the whole numbers.
To enter decimal point, rotate scroll wheel. The field will change with a decimal point and one, two
or three default digits after the decimal point.
To amend the value after decimal point, press right key which will move the cursor to the end of the
field.
You can then delete digits after the decimal point by pressing left key once twice or thrice.
Now enter new numbers which you want after the decimal point and press OK.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 22 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
6.2. Shortcut Keys
The instrument includes shortcut keys to directly navigate to a specific parameter in the menu.

TPBH-OM-G13

Key

Full Name

Action

F1

Function 1

Shortcut to Display tab Views box

F2

Function 2

Shortcut to Display tab Distance box

F3

Function 3

ZOOM

Zoom

SPAN

Span

Short cut to DAQ Range value

CAL

Calibration

Short cut to velocity calibration mode

GAIN

Gain

Short cut to Gain value

COLOR

Color Palette

Short cut to color palette gradient.

Auto Gain Adjustment Gated


peaks are adjusted to 80%
of screen height.
On a selected view, the instrument
will zoom in between the cursors.
Pressing again will zoom out.

Screen capture of the entire screen


and record it to selected media.
Record media can be selected from
system TAB
Cycle through the various ruler
display options.

SNAP

Snapshot

RULER

Ruler

ZERO

Zero

Short cut to DAQ Delay value

GATE

Gate

Short cut to Gate values

SAVE

Save

Save the configuration file.

RPT

Report

OPEN

Open

System will generate a report with


view, cursor, and gate settings and it
will be saved to selected media.
Open File (Configuration, data,
report, File Management, etc.).

Page 23 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
6.3. Saving and Recalling Files

The temate PowerBox H can record and store four different types of files:
Configuration Files.cfg. Store all the setup parameters for easy access to saved configurations.
Data Files .datStore the entire inspection along with the configuration used for that inspection.
Report Files .rpt. Provide snap shots of Scan Views with cursor readouts in a tabulated format. It
also includes TX/RX parameters, DAQ parameters and System Hardware Information.
Screen captures .png. Screen captures in png form.
All data files can be viewed in the PC viewer software provided with the instrument. In addition to this, Data
Files can also be exported to an ASCII or CSV file for view with other programs.
All files can be stored in four different drives:
SD Card.
USB.
Internal Flash Memory.
RAM (Temporary Storage Only Data will be lost at Power Down).
Some SD cards and USB drives may not be compatible with the unit. Known compatible brands include
SanDisk, Kingston, Dane-Elec, Transcend, Lexar, Staples, and Verbatim.
To select the media to save files, go to System Tab and select Record Media. This becomes the default
save location to save data, report and screen snapshots. The configuration files are saved using SAVE.
General File Operations

OPEN and SAVE keys will enter the File browser.


ESCAPE/CANCEL keys will exit the File browser.
SAVE key permits saving a file or data at any point during the operation of the equipment.
Pressing OPEN twice will enter into File Management mode. This mode permits copying, moving,
deleting and renaming files within and among drives.

Configuration Files

OPEN or SAVE key to enter File menu.


Scroll to select Configuration files only (*.cfg) or All and press SEL or OK.
Select an existing file name or type a name to create a new one
SAVE Key to record a configuration file.
Configuration files can be saved at any point during the operation of the equipment.

Data Files

To record and save data on the selected drive, press START (Red Dot) for three seconds or more,
the display on top left hand corner will change to REC.
Release START (Red Dot) button and data recording will begin.
After pressing stop, the data will automatically be transferred to the drive.
OPEN key to enter File menu.
Scroll to select *.dat files only or All and press SEL or OK.
Select a file name by pressing OK.
The user interface will load with the data from the file. All parameters except some from the
DISPLAY menu tab will be read only.
The view(s) will be loaded with the data from the file.
Use cursors to make measurements.
To generate Reports, remove measurements from screen.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 24 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
Report Files

To save a report file for analysis, press the RPT key.


A report will be generated in report folder.
The report file name will be named as the selected Record File Name items in GENERAL Tab.
To open a report file for viewing, press the OPEN key.
OPEN menu will be displayed. Press ESCAPE/CANCEL to exit
On top-left corner, select REPORT (*.rpt) filter or ANY file (.*) filter.
Navigate to the report folder and select the file to open. Each report file is saved in a separate
folder along with other files depending upon the display selected
Select the file with .rpt extension to open.
The report will show in full screen. Use scroll wheel or USB mouse to browse.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 25 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
6.4. File Management
File Management mode is activated by pressing twice the OPEN key.

This mode permits deleting and renaming files as well as copying and moving between the different drives
(medias).
To operate, select the source and destination medias. Press OK to browse files within a media and press
SEL to select the file. The cursor will move to the options menu (Copy, Move, Delete, Rename or Close).
For example, to copy a file from the internal flash drive to an SD card, select source media ia as Internal
Flash Media and destination media as SD Card. Scroll to the file in Internal Flash Media and press SEL
followed by COPY. The file is now copied to SD Card at the selected location.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 26 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual

7. PowerUT H Software
7.1. Quick Reference

The temate PowerBox H includes PowerUT H software application. This application provides most of the
generic controls used in advanced UT flaw detectors, plus a number of proprietary features especially
designed for EMAT applications.
Standard Features:
A, B, C Scans and Strip Chart Views.
PRF and Gain selections.
Flaw and Back-wall Gates.
Manual, External Input, and Encoder median triggers.
Distance Amplitude Correction Graphs.
Time-Of-Flight (TOF) measurement algorithms (zero crossing and autocorrelation).
Calibration.
Unique EMAT features:
Frequency and number of cycles (from 0.5 to 5 complete cycles).
Transmitting and receiving delay options.
Timing for external magnet pulsers.
Advanced software filters and algorithms to enhance signal-to-noise.
Normalization gate (provides self-calibration for guided wave applications).
The main screen is organized in 5 sections:
STATUS Bar
MEASUREMENT Bar
THICKNESS MEASUREMENT Bar

VIEW Area

MENU Area

*
*
*
*
*

STATUS bar shows information about the instrument status. The bar is always displayed.
MEASUREMENT bar shows the value of various cursors and gates in a view, and any important
messages.
THICKNESS bar shows the value of Thickness derived from Gate 2 TOF in large characters for
improved readability.
VIEW area will feature one or many views, depending on the screen layout selected.
MENU area displays the menu when open. It is organized in seven tabs accessible using the right
and left arrows.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 27 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.1.1. Measurement Bar Options
Four different Measurement Bar display options are accessible on the DISPLAY menu. The options include
A-Scan, Strip Chart, B and C-scan and Alarm as shown below.

Measurement Bar for A-scan

Measurement Bar for Strip Chart

Measurement Bar for B-scan and C-scan

Measurement Bar for Alarms

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 28 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.1.2. Measurement Cursors View Area
All views (A-scan, Strip Chart, B-scan and C-scan) include two cursor bars (red and yellow) that can be
used to measure absolute Amplitude or TOF at a given location of the cursor or provide differential
measurements. The measurement values are displayed in the Measurement Bars.
To select and move the cursors, first press SEL to highlight the View and then repeatedly press CUR to
toggle between red or yellow cursor in the view. In case of A-scan view the CUR will also toggle between
Gate bars. Use arrow keys (Up, Down, Left, Right) to move cursor on the screen. In A-scan View the
cursors can Snap to A (in Display Tab) where cursors vertical position will snap to each sample point on
A-scan. In case of A-scan + B-scan view the cursor can also LINK A/B (in Display Tab) which causes
simultaneous movement of cursors in A-scan and B-scan displaying the same point or area on the screen.
Once the cursors are placed on the view screen, the measurements can be read on the Measurement Bar.
The measurement value will only update in Measurement Bar when the View screen is selected by pressing
SEL button and one or both cursors are selected (CUR button). To create a permanent record of the
measurements, reports can be generated by pressing RPT button (keypad) for each measurement.

Cursors and Measurements A-scan View

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 29 of 61

Cursors and Measurements Strip View

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.1.3. SYSTEM Menu Tab
The SYSTEM Menu Tab is used for general system settings.

Parameter Name

Action

Language

Changes operating language.

Default Units

Switches between Metric and Imperial units.

Record Media

Selects media for saving and retrieving files.

Date/Time

Date and time adjustment.

Screen Timers

Enable/disable timers.

Efficiency Mode
Timer

Specifies the period of inactivity before the system goes


into efficiency mode. The system will continue to collect
data but the screen will be dimmed to preserve power

Auto-Shutdown
Timer

Specifies the period of inactivity before the system is shut


down.

Timers on Battery
Only

Enables timers only when the system is running on


battery.

Brightness

Controls TFT screen brightness.

Video Out
Ethernet Settings

TPBH-OM-G13

Permits switching between instrument and external


monitor.
Use DHCP Client to connect Gateway for Internet
Browsing if Network Cable is connected. Can also be used
for Remote Access in future software upgrade.

Page 30 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.1.4. GENERAL Menu Tab
The General Menu Tab used to enter inspection specific information

TPBH-OM-G13

Parameter Name

Action

Company Name

Company Name.

Inspector Name

Inspector Name.

Site Description

Site Description.

Primary Tag

Primary identification Tag for the inspection.

Secondary Tag

Secondary identification Tag for the inspection

Admin Password

NA (pending)

Record Directory

Directory folder for storing data.

Record File Name


Items

Information to be written to the file name

Start Record Index

Starting number for the data file.

Comments

General comments.

Page 31 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.1.5. TX/RX Menu Tab
The TX/RX Menu Tab permits setting timing and signal parameters.

Parameter Name

Action

Magnet

Enable trigger function for external electromagnet.

Duration

Control the length of time that the magnet is on.

Voltage

Sets transmit voltage to full power (1200Vpp) or half


power (600Vpp)

Burst Frequency

Sets frequency of transmitted signal.

Number of Cycle(s)

Number of cycles per burst in 0.5 cycle increments from


0.5 to xx

Set PRF

Desired Pulse Repetition Frequency. Actual achievable


PRF depends on various settings.

Obtained PRF

Effective PRF based on current settings.

Initial Mag Delay

Preliminary time to enable the electro-magnet, to rampup the magnetic field.

Data Window

Length of the DAQ range

RX Delay

Length of time for DAQ delay.

RX Gain

Receive signal gain.

External Signal
Conditioning Box*
Display Timing
Graph

Type of inspection Pulse-Echo or Pitch-Catch.


To be selected when you connect external signal
conditioning box.
Displays transmit, receive and magnet timings
graphically to improve understanding.

The device includes hardware tuned to provide pulse-echo measurements at 1.5-4MHz using our
standard normal beam sensors and coils. The external Signal Conditioning Box attachment permits
inspections using any coils from our standard catalog in pulse-echo or pitch-catch.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 32 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.1.6. DSP/Gates Menu Tab
The DSP/Gates Menu Tab provides access to filters and algorithms used in Digital Signal Processing and
the Gates.

TPBH-OM-G13

Parameter Name

Action

Coincidence

Can be used to eliminate noise caused by other electric


devices such as electric motors

Average

Determines how many consecutive signals should be


averaged to provide a resulting signal.

Enable Filtering

Apply Digital Filter

Design Filter

Can be used to select different band-pass filters, adjust


lower and upper cut-off frequencies and plot filter
response.

Gate Enable

Enable/Disable Gate

Gate Start

Adjust the start of the Gate

Gate Range

Adjust the duration of the Gate.

Gate Threshold

Adjust the threshold for Gate

Gate Menu

Change the Gate options

Strip Chart
Content

Displays Amplitude, TOF, Thickness or Temperature. Two


output values can be simultaneously displayed.

Page 33 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.1.7. DAQ Menu Tab
The DAQ Menu Tab provides access to Digital Acquisition parameters such as acquisition start time, probe
offsets, ultrasound velocity, type of trigger and encoder settings.

Parameter Name

Action

DAQ Delay

Adjusts when in time the A-scan acquisition should start.

Probe Zero

Adjusts probe time offset due to electronic delays.

DAQ Range

Adjusts how long in time the A-scan acquisition will last.

Sampling Frequency

Adjusts the sampling frequency of the received signal.

Calibrate
Thermocouple
Calibrate
Velocity (Ref)

Opens up menu to calibrate external thermocouple probe.


Opens up velocity calibration panel.

Temp Reference

Displays temperature at which the last velocity calibration was done.

Temp Measured

Current temperature of the part under inspection.

Velocity Reference

Displays calibrated sound velocity of the inspected material.

Velocity Measured

Corrected velocity at the measured temperature value

Lock

Locks the temperature readout to calculate velocity correction.

Temp Correction

Used for High Temperature Measurements. Enables measured temperature and velocity fields.

Trigger Source

Toggles between different Trigger Sources

Axis Enable

Enable/Disable Axis

Axis Start

Adjusts the start position for Axis for data recording.

Axis Stop

Adjusts the stop position for Axis

Axis Pitch

Adjusts the position interval to trigger and acquire new data.

Axis Zero

Forces the current Axis position to zero and enables Axis Position field for calibration.

Axis Position

Adjusts the encoder travel distance to calibrate mm/tick.

Axis Set

Calibrates encoder by calculating mm/tick, based on the encoder travel distance

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 34 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.1.8. DISPLAY Menu Tab
The DISPLAY Menu Tab provides access to how the user views the data collected.

Parameter Name

Action

Pattern

Selects color gradient for B and C Scan representation.

Minimum Threshold

Adjust the minimum amplitude for a particular shade in the gradient.

Saturate Threshold

Adjust the maximum amplitude for a particular shade in the gradient.

Views

Selects the type of scan/s(A, B, C or Strip Chart) and its size to be displayed on the screen.

A-scan Skip

Display Settings for A-scan to increase effective PRF

Thickness Measurement

Displays or hides thickness measurement bar.

A-scan H Ruler

Displays or hides horizontal ruler in A-scan.

A-scan V Ruler

Displays or hides vertical ruler in A-scan.

A-scan Distance in us

Shows distance/depth values in microseconds.

A-scan Rectification

Turns on/off rectification for A-scan signal.

A-scan Keep max

Keeps maximum values on A-Scan if pixel compression occurs.

A-scan Keep Min

Keeps minimum values on A-Scan if pixel compression occurs

Signal Fill (Options)

Display option for No Fill, Signal Fill, Max Fill and Min Fill

A-scan DAC

Superimposes a DAC curve on top of the A-scan.

A-scan DAC Edit

Opens the DAC curve menu.

B/C/Strip H Ruler

Displays the horizontal ruler in B/C-scan and Strip chart.

B/C/Strip V Ruler

Displays the vertical ruler in B/C-scan and Strip chart.

Compress B

Keeps maximum values when compressing an A-scan into a B-scan.

Vertical Strip Chart

Rotates the strip chart 90 on screen.

Cursors Link A/B

Links cursors in A-scan and B-scan, for synchronized movement.

Cursors Snap to A

Forces the A-scan cursor to snap to an actual sample value.

Big Cursors

Increases Cursors width for better visibility

C-Vertical Strip

Display strip chart vertically along C-scan

C-scan Content

Selects peak amplitude or TOF to be shown on C-Scan.

Measurement Bar
Strip Min
Strip Max

TPBH-OM-G13

Changes content of measurement bar.


Sets the lower limit for Strip Chart-1. Used to view small changes in TOF or Thickness
Measurements.
Sets the lower limit for Strip Chart-1. Used to view small changes in TOF or Thickness
Measurements.

Page 35 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.1.9. HELP Menu Tab
The HELP Menu Tab provides options for built-in and on-line help.

Parameter Name

Action

Application Wizard

Will be available in later software versions

Display Help

Display help files.

Fullscreen

Display help in full screen.

Hide Views

Displays help on top of the views.

Hide Param tab

Displays help on top of the menu.

Show Web Browser

Displays web browser. Only standard HTM can be displayed

Home Page

URL of the home page.

The System Info Tab provides information about the platform, cartridge and status of storage devices.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 36 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2. Basic Operation

This manual provides a basic operation guide for the temate PowerBox H unit but it is not designed to
substitute formal training. It is highly recommended that new users take an EMAT training course to learn
to set experiments, and use the full capabilities of the equipment. Contact Innerspec Technologies for
training courses in your area.
The systems include built-in setups for the most common applications. However, the user has complete
flexibility to change or modify the settings as desired. It is recommended to back up all the setup files
provided with the system for quick restore. This section explains some common operations needed to
setup any application or inspection.
7.2.1. Technique Set Up (TX/RX)

This panel permits changing the frequency of excitation for the transducer by selecting the Burst
Frequencyand the number of cycles in the burst. More cycles can increase signal to noise (up to a point)
but could reduce resolution and battery life.
PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) selection permits setting the pulsing velocity. However, real PRF might
be different than set PRF depending on resources used during the inspection. The resources will vary
depending on the time/data windows, gate widths and the algorithms and filters selected. Low PRF will
require slow scanning to avoid leaving areas uninspected.
Rx Delay is used to delay the start of Receiver. The DAQ will wait for the specified time as per Rx Delay
before collecting samples. The display window will also shift left as per the Delay value. The Receiver gain
can also be adjusted from 20dB to 100dB in Pulse-Echo (T/R) mode and from -20dB to 60dB in Pitch-Catch
(T/R->R) mode.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 37 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.2. Magnet Setup

Magnet setup is used to control pulsed electromagnets used for some EMAT applications. This feature is

only available to trained users, and requires temate PowerBox MP magnet-pulsers, and electromagnet
probes. Contact Innerspec Technologies for details.
The magnet Duration is the total time magnet will remain on. This duration should be equal to at least the
DAQ Range plus the Data Window. The magnet delay is needed to give sufficient time for the magnet to
reach its maximum flux density before transmitting the RF pulse. The magnet should stay on until data
collection is finished for each sample.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 38 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.3. Filters and Gates (DSP/GATES)

The received signal can be processed using various filters. The Coincidence filter is used to remove unsynchronous RF frequency interferences, which sometimes appears like spikes or running waves (aka
running rabbits) on the A-scan window. The Average increases signal-to-noise ratio.
The user can also design and apply a digital band-pass filter as shown above. The lower cut-off and upper
cut-off frequencies can be adjusted using the keypad or thumb wheel. The filter quality is determined by the
number of taps (64, 128 or 256). Higher tap weights (filter coefficients) increase the quality of the filter, but
consume more system resources, and affect maximum PRF.
The Gates can be adjusted using the menu controls or dynamically adjusted directly on the A-Scan view
panel. To adjust the gates directly on the A-Scan, press SEL to shift to the A-scan. Press CUR as needed
until the desired gate is highlighted. Use up/down, or left/right navigation keys to adjust the position of
the gate. To adjust the gate width, highlight the gate using CUR key. Press OK (Check Mark) to select the
left or right edge of the gate (use OK to toggle from one edge to the other). Once the edge is selected, use
the right or left arrow to reduce or increase the gate width. Press SEL when done to exit the A-Scan.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 39 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.4. Measurements and Alarms
The gates Menu provides advanced gate control parameters. All Gates can be used for Amplitude or
TOF measurements, and include automatic threshold setting for Alarms. A total of four Alarms (G1-Amp,
G2 Amp, G3 Amp and G2 TOF) are available. Gate1 is normally used as CAL (calibration) gate (normally
used for guided wave applications. Refer to the appropriate Application Sheets). Gate-2 as Flaw gate and
Gate-3 as a back-wall gate for normal beam inspections.Gate-2 is the only gate used for thickness
measurements, and provides three optional algorithms for calculating TOF:

Peak in the gate


Zero-Crossing
Auto-Correlation
Zero-Crossing on First Peak After Threshold

Select DISPLAY tab and set Measurement Bar on Alarms. All Alarm conditions can be displayed in the
Measurement Bar for G1, G2 and G3. DIO (Digital Input Output) connector can also be used to media other
devices in case of Alarms. The system has the provision to provide 6 digital inputs and 6 digital outputs if
needed.

7.2.4.1. Gate 1 Parameters

Alarm-1 can be enabled by selecting Threshold (Alarm1) with options to set Validity or Alarm. If
Validity is selected than as soon as Peak signal level within Gate-1 drops below threshold, the inspection
data will become invalid indicated with YELLOW color in Measurement Bar. The B-scan data will also be
painted YELLOW. If user selects option to Alarm, then as soon as the Peak amplitude crosses the Gate-1
threshold level the system will display Alarm in RED on the measurement bar. In case of B-scan this
condition is indicated with RED color. The Alarm set the Alarm-1 bit high on the digital input/output
connector which can be configured to media any other device.
If Saturation Detection is enabled, the Alarm will display peak amplitude Saturated within the gate when
amplitude value exceeds 100% in the gate. This will also be indicated on the Measurement Bar for Alarms.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 40 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.4.2. Gate 2 Parameters

Alarm 2 can be set on Gate-2 amplitude for Crossing Above the threshold or Crossing Below the
threshold for G2 amplitude Alarm condition.
Relative to Gate 1 Amplitude (Signal Normalization) once checked divides G2 amplitude with G1 amplitude
to perform point-by-point self calibration. This feature is recommended for flaw detection with guided waves
(reflection technique with separate transmitter and receiver).
Alarm 3 is used for TOF or Thickness threshold using Gate-2. Alarm-3 is enabled by selecting
TOF/Thickness Threshold (Alarm 3). If the TOF algorithm is Peak or Zero-Crossing the Alarm can be
set between minimum TOF (G2 Start) to maximum TOF (G2 End). These thresholds can be adjusted in s
for TOF or in mm for Thickness. In case TOF algorithm is selected to be Auto-Correlation, the minimum
and maximum thresholds can range from 0 s to the width of G2. The minimum thickness value needs to
be adjusted for auto-correlation algorithm. This value can change due to the transducers frequency of
excitation, and number of cycles in a burst. Using 3000 kHz excitation and 1 cycle, the minimum
measurable thickness is approximately 1.5mm.
Track Back Wall enables adjusting the width of G2 with reference to G3. Normally G3 is in this application is
set on the back-wall and G2 is set to detect flaws very close to the back-wall surface. Using this feature the
user can lock G2 to move according to changes in TOF measured on G3.
Circle Tracking Gate will display a circle on the TOF reference point in A-scan using Zero-Crossing and
Peak algorithm only. This feature is helpful in knowing the exact peak in the reflected signal which is being
used as reference to measure TOF.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 41 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.4.3. Gate 3 Parameters

Alarm-4 can be enabled by selecting Threshold (Alarm4) with options for Validity or Alarm. Validity
will alarm in yellow when the peak signal level within G3 drops below the selected threshold (invalid data).
The B-scan data will also be painted yellow. Alarm will display the Alarm caption in red in the
measurement bar, and change the color of the B-scan if the maximum value on G3 reaches the threshold
level. Saturation Detection will display Saturated caption in the measurement bar when when the
amplitude value exceeds 100% in the gate.
7.2.5. Strip Chart Options
DSP GATES panel also provides setups for Strip Chart view. The systems Strip Chart view can display two
outputs from any of the gates along with ability to display temperature. The right side ruler of strip chart will
display the Y-axis values for strip-1 and left side ruler will display Y-axis values for strip-2. The X-axis
values can be encoded by changing Trigger Source (DAQ panel) from Free-running to Encoder mode. The
various options which can be displayed in a strip chart are:

G1 Amp
G1 TOF
G2 Amp
G2 TOF
G3 Amp
G3 TOF
Thick
Temp

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 42 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.6. Calibration and Running Modes (DAQ)

DAQ Delay sets where the zero or starting point of the display. It is used to eliminate from view a portion
of the display that is not interesting for the user.
Probe-zero is used to offset any delays due to hardware/processing. It can also be adjusted manually in
case of piezoelectric transducers to offset delays due to wedge.
The Calibration button is used for velocity calibration, and Calibration Temperature is used to calibrate
the device to measure correct temperature. The system is also capable of providing sampling frequencies
of 10MHz, 25MHz, 50MHz and 100MHz. Please note that for good signal reconstruction in digital domain
the sampling frequency should be at least 10 times the RF frequency. The Data Window size, also
referred to as DAQ Range is also dependent on the selected sampling frequency. When a large data
window size is desired, it is recommended to use the lowest possible sampling frequency to optimize
maximum PRF possible.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 43 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.7. Encoder Setup (DAQ)

Setting Trigger Source to Encoder enables the Encoders Calibration and Sequence setups. To calibrate
encoder, press 0 and edit the distance to be used for calibration. In the above figure it is shown a distance
of 200mm. To calibrate, press START and the system will start pulsing when the encoder moves. Move the
encoder the distance selected, and press SET, to calculate mm/tick distance.
The Encoder Sequence is setup by editing the values for start and stop. The pitch can be adjusted based
on the distance (mm/tick) calculated during calibration. Encoder PN 281A0002 from Innerspec
Technologies is set from the factory to 0.25 mm/tick. To setup an encoded in-line scan sampling every
3mm, the pitch in the scan setup can be adjusted to 12 (0.25 mm/tick x 12 = 3mm).
The forward encoder motion will paint forward and reverse motion will paint in reverse direction. The
maximum scan can be from -10m to +10m.
The system provides complete flexibility to integrate two encoders (Axis-1 and Axis-2) of any make and
type with the system.
For maximum PRF/speed during scanning, change VIEW to Strip Only or B-scan only. For optimum
performance, use A-scan VIEW only when setting the experiment

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 44 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.8. Calibrate Thermocouple

A thermocouple probe such as PN 281A0001 provided by Innerspec Technologeis can be calibrated by


using the Calibrate Thermocouple menu on the DAQ panel.
To calibrate, edit the Temp-1 field with the known temperature value of a reference part. Now place the
thermocouple to be calibrated on the same partand pressAdd. Press OK to exit from this panel. To
increase accuracy, add points as needed.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 45 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.9. Calibrate Velocity, and Temperature Correction

Velocity calibration is necessary for accurate thickness measurements. The temate PowerBox H provides
different TOF calculation algorithms. For zero-crossing, the system requires two known depth values to
calculate Offset (Probe Delay) and Calibrated Velocity. When using the Auto-Correlation algorithm,
only one known depth value is required to determine Calibrated Velocity. Offset (Probe Delay)
calculation is not necessary using this algorithm.
For maximum accuracy or when the calibration part is known to be at a different temperature than the
material to be inspected, it is necessary to use a Reference Temperature in the calibration process. To use
this feature, enable Temperature Ref.When using a thermocouple attached to the equipment, press pulse
to start reading the temperature (the sensor can be in the air or on a part).Once the temperature reading is
appropriate, press Lock to fix the temperature value. Pressing Lock also permits manual editing of the
temperature value. Enter the depth value for velocity calibration. Press Add to calculate TOF values for
velocity calibration and probe offset.

During the inspection, the Temperature correction can be performed on DAQ tab by enabling Temp
Correction. When using a thermocouple attached to the instrument, it needs to be pulsing (the sensor can
be in the air or on any part) to read the temperature of the part. Press Lock to fix the temperature
value.The velocity will be automatically correctedusing the algorithm (Correction Formula) previously
selected in the calibration process. The new velocity will be displayed in the Measured Velocity field.
Apply transducer to the part and perform inspection. The values of the measurements will be calculated
using the temperature-corrected velocity.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 46 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.10. Display (DISPLAY)

The color palette can be adjusted for minimum and maximum thresholds to enhance the contrast for small
variation.
A-scan skip provides ability to pulse at higher PRF using A-scan in VIEW mode. The A-scan mode takes
considerable resources from the instrument to render the complete data window, and may not be able to
achieve more than 25 PRF. Higher PRF can be achieved by skipping one or more alternate A-scans.
Compress B is used to display B-scan data in real-time, in a compressed format (low resolution) to
increase PRF and speed of inspection. The actual B-scan data will be saved in full resolution and can be
displayed later after the scanning has completed.
Link A/B when enabled causes cursors in A-scan view and B-scan view be linked together.
Snap to A causes the cursors in A-scan to snap to the samples amplitude value. It provides ability to
readout the true amplitude at a certain location in A-scan view.
Measurement Bar shifts to the cursors position readouts based on the active view. The focus can be shifted
to any view using SEL button on keypad.
Strip Min and Max permits setting the Y-axis range for Strip-1 when measuring TOF or Thickness. Y-axis
scaling options are only available for Strip-1, so it should always be selected for TOF and thickness
measurements. The Zoom button should only be used to zoom horizontally between two cursor locations.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 47 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.11. Overlaying DAC Curves on A-Scan (DAQ)

DAC Curves can be editted and overlayed on A-scan view using DISPLAY tab. Gate1 should be enabled
before editing the DAC curves (shown above in Red) as Gate1 is used for recording the points.
The system permits recording any four points on A-scan view, and set the DAC curve using a Linear Fit or
Polynomial Regression.
Enable DAC and press EDIT. Start pulsing, and press SEL to shift to the A-scan view. Press CUR to select
Gate1, and using navigation arrow keys, position the gate on the peak to be recorded as point-1 in the DAC
curve. Press SEL again to toggle to the DAC edit menu, and press Add Point. Up to four points can be
added by repeating the same process. Select the Curve Fit algorithm (Linear or Polynomial fit), and press
Set New DAC. Four different DAC curves will be overlayed at 0dB, -6dB, -12dB and -20dB.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 48 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
7.2.12. Generating C-Scan

From Views in Display panel, C-scan can be displayed alone or can be displayed with A-scan or strip chart
options. In C-scan + A-scan option the A-scan data will also be displayed while acquiring C-scan data for
each sample point. In case of C-scan + Strip option, the Strip-Chart is only used to review C-scan data
after data acquisition has completed. In C-scan review mode, the strip chart will display the data along the
horizontal position of the cursor or along the vertical position of the cursor. To display the data along the
vertical position of the cursor the user must enable C-Vertical Strip in Display Tab. The C-scan is a
2-dimentional data where the information from gate-2 (G2) can be plotted using shades of color provided by
the selected palette. The C-scan can be plotted for the amplitude value in G2 or can be plotted for TOF
data using C-scan Contents in Display Tab. In case of TOF as C-scan Contents, the thickness information
can also be displayed by selecting thickness measurement bar.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 49 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual

To record a C-scan both X and Y encoders (Axis-1 and Axis-2) are needed. If Y-encoder (Axis-2) is not
available users can still generate C-scan by generating Y-encoder trigger manually or automatically based
on the Axis-2 (Y/Index) parameters. User selects the horizontal and vertical area of scan by providing
Axis-1 and Axis-2 Start and Stop values. To increment Y-index manually, ensure Automatic Axis-2 is
disabled. Start pulsing and move probe in the X-axis, when probe reaches the end or when you want to do
Y-increment, select C-scan view area by pressing SELECT and press DOWN arrow key and start moving
the probe in reverse direction. The C-scan will start painting second line in reverse direction. Again reaching
back to the X-axis start position, press DOWN arrow key again and start moving probe in the forward
direction. In case Automatic Axis-2 is enabled the Y-index would be incremented automatically when
probe reaches the either end of X-axis scan range as specified by Start and Stop values.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 50 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
8. PowerBox H Input Output Panel
8.1. Setting-Up IO Panel
At this stage only one Input (input-5) has been configured to Start and Stop the device remotely and one of
the outputs (output-6) has been programmed which can be configured for the selected Alarm. In most of the
cases if alarm is desired on amplitude crossing the threshold, user will select G2 MENU () and enable
Alarm-2 crossing Above. G2 must be enabled for Alarm-2. The brief description of Alarms also provided
below:

Alarm-1
Amplitude Threshold
G1 needs to be enabled

Alarm-2
Amplitude Threshold
G2 needs to be enabled

Alarm-3
TOF/Thickness Threshold
G2 needs to be enabled

Alarm-4
Amplitude Threshold
G3 needs to be enabled
The device needs to be using sampling rate of 50MHz selected from the DAQ Tab. The 100MHz sampling
rate will cause display to be erratic and will be fixed shortly with an update.

Power Box H Input Output Panel

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 51 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
8.2. Input Output Connector
The temate PowerBox H includes a 19 pin Lemo connector to provide power to external signal
conditioning boxes, and communicate with two-axis encoders and other external devices (2 inputs and 2
outputs). The drawing below provides information on this connector.

Note:
Isolation devices like opto-couplers are recommended to protect the device while connecting external
signals to IO connector.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 52 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
9. Software Upgrades
The instruments software is designed to be easily updated by the user. After receiving the new .upd file
from Innerspec Technologies, follow these instructions carefully:

Copy the firmware update (.UPD file) into the root (main) directory of the USB drive provided with
the unit, or on a USB drive from an approved vendor. See section 6.3 for details.
Connect AC Power Supply to instrument. Only perform updates when the instrument is connected
with the external power supply.
Plug the USB drive (use micro USB adapter included with the equipment if needed), and turn the
instrument ON.

When the temate logo splash screen shows up, hold down the left arrow button in the keypad to
bring up the Main Update menu.
In the Main Update menu, navigate to the Install Update option using the scroll wheel, and select
it by pressing the OK button.
A file menu opens up with all the available files in the different storage media. Select USB media,
and highlight the correct software update file. Press SEL in the keypad to navigate to the Install
button in the GUI. Start installation by selecting Install Update.
Each update file may also contain some important messages about the update file.
The installation takes a few minutes, and should end with a message reporting success. Turn OFF
the device by pressing the power button once.
Turn ON the device again and enter the update menu by keeping the left arrow button pressed.
Select the Uninstall Application menu option. This opens up another file menu with a single

entry PowerBox H. Press SEL in the keypad to navigate to the Uninstall button in the GUI.
Press OK after selecting Uninstall.
Go back to the Main Update menu using the MENU button in the GUI.
Select Install Cartridge menu option and press OK. This step installs the software application for
the cartridge. At the end of this step, a Done message appears along with a Start Application
button.
The software is fully updated. You may start the application or turn OFF the device.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 53 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
10. PC Viewer Software
The instrument comes with an easy to use desktop application to view and save settings, generate reports
etc. The GUI of the software is similar to the instrument.
To use the application unzip the file to a folder and run PowerBoxH.exe.

Keyboard Shortcut

Function

Ctrl+ O

Open File

Ctrl+ S

Save File

Ctrl+ P

Generate Report

Ctrl+ +

Zoom in

Ctrl+ -

Zoom out

Open File is used to load a Data file or Report File to review.


Save File exports the data into a .csv file and saves it back in the same directory with the name
provided by the user. This file can be opened in Excel and data from each sample point can be
further processed in any other software as needed.
Generate Report will generate a report, which will be saved in Report folder. The generated
report can be opened using Open File and can be converted into PDF for distribution and print
out.

NOTE:
1. PC Viewer Software provides complete DATA EXPORT functionality using Ctrl+ S option as
explained above.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 54 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual

11. temate PowerBox H Remote Data Acquisition

The Remote Data acquisition can be used to collect data for any available application on the

temate PowerBox H, where the unit is placed at remote location connected to a local laptop or
desktop through a network cable.

Switch on the temate PowerBox H and connect with your network using Ethernet cable.
Run the PC viewer on your desktop or Laptop and connect it to your local network.

On temate PowerBox H, enable DHCP on the GENERAL Tab and provide network Gateway
address and your DNS server address.

On PC viewer, Load a configuration file in the PC version, or change the parameters you want to
change.
On PC viewer, open Remote Control menu in TX/RX tab and connect to remote host by entering IP
address in the text box.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 55 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual

Press Push config to remote host. The configuration file opened on PC Viewer will be transferred
to the remote Power Box-H.
On PC Viewer, Start an acquisition by pressing PLAY.

Change Gain or PRF (only these parameters can be changed through remote control). To change
any other parameter you must disconnect and adjust your configuration file again.
Stop acquisition and press RECORD. The data will be recorded on the remote device (Laptop /
Desktop).
Stop recording.
Disconnect from device.
Open file on the device.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 56 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
12. Troubleshooting

USB Not Recognized.


o Try using another USB from the recommended manufacturers (see section 6.3. of this manual)

SD Card Not Recognized.


o The system cannot recognize the SD card if it is started with the card inside the slot. Remove
the SD card from the slot and restart the system. Insert SD card.
o If the SD card is removed while the system is running, it will not be recognized if inserted again,
unless the system is restarted.

System Locked-up
o Press CANCEL or X three times in succession for soft-reset.
o If problem still persists, press power button for approximately 7 seconds for a hard-reset. The
screen will turn green or black, wait for system shut down, and restart again all files will be lost.

Noisy A-scan
o Check that all cables are properly inserted in the connectors.
o Increase Coincidence Filter taps.
o Increase averaging.
o Use a better quality filter Q3(256) with a narrow band-pass filter around the excited transducer
frequency.
o Ground the part with a metallic strap from the part to the connector of the receiver.

For any problems with this unit, contact Innerspec Technologies Technical Support. Details in section 12.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 57 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
13. Maintenance
Maintenance of this unit is restricted to charging the battery, and occasional cleaning of the equipment.

Battery will begin charging when the AC power is connected and will continue until fully charged.
The Battery is removed by sliding tab on lid on top of the unit. Re-insert by aligning the keyed slot
with the bottom of the casing.
The display screen may be cleaned using slightly damp (water) cloth and wiping with light
pressure.The case may be cleaned with mild household detergent.
**WARNING**

The temate PowerBox H is designed to resist occasional splashing


of liquids on the surface of the unit.
Do not immerse or expose to direct water streams.
Keep water and other liquids away from the connectors, ports, and battery.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 58 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
14. Accessories
Innerspec Technologies offers hundreds of EMAT sensors (contact Innerspec for catalog), and many

accessories for the temate PowerBox H, including:


14.1.

Signal Conditioning and Multiplexing Attachments

These snap-on modules connect directly to the temate PowerBox H to provide pulse-echo multiplexing,
and pitch-catch signal conditioning for guided wave and angle beam applications.
Part
Number

279A0009

279A0010

Type &
Frequency

Probes &
Sensors

1:8Multiplexer
Pulse-Echo

All
Normal
Beam
except
160A0046

Signal
Conditioning
1 Channel
Pitch-Catch
Angled Beam &
Guided Waves
(includes 1 slot
for Tuning
Module)

14.2.

274A0244
274A0106
274A0107
274A0120
274A0144
274A0108
160A0062
160A0049
160A0076
160A0119

Minimum
Cables
Required*

Connector
Instrument

Connector
Probe

1232A0123

Not
Applicable
(snap-on
Module)

6 Pin Lemo
1B
19 Pin
Lemo 2B
Type K
Mini

2232A0123

Not
Applicable
(snap-on
Module)

2-2 Pin
Lemo 0B
19
PinLemo
2B
Type K
Mini

Dimensions

4.16W x 4.48D x 3.63H


105mm x 114mm x 92mm

Encoders, Thermocouple, Batteries and Other Accessories

Part
Number

Description

Connector

281A0002

Encoder
Cable Length: 120cm
Resolution: 4p/mm -100ppi

Lemo
FGG.2B.319.CLAD62Z

281A0001

Thermocouple

210V0002

210V0003

Probes

Instrument

Picture

274A0107
274A0144
274A0120
274A0121

temate
PowerBox H

Type K Mini

NA

temate
PowerBox H

Spare Battery

NA

NA

temate
PowerBox H

Battery charger (dual slot)

NA

NA

temate
PowerBox H
-

211V0053

AC/DC power pack


with AC cord

NA

NA

temate
PowerBox H

232V0477

Body Harness

NA

NA

temate
PowerBox H

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 59 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
15. Limited Warranty

The temate PowerBox H has passed strict controls under ISO 9001:2008 quality guidelines, and is
designed to use in industrial environments.
Innerspec Technologies warrants its products to be free of defects in Material and Workmanship for a
period of one year from date of purchase by end user. Innerspec Technologies will, at its choice, replace
or repair parts found defective and return equipment or parts to the purchaser.
The above stated warranty does not apply to expendable or consumable parts, and to products which have
failed due to misuse, alteration, unauthorized repair or modification. The purchaser is responsible for
transportation costs of the equipment to and from the factory for warranty replacement or repair. The above
warranty does not include incidental or consequential damages.
Innerspec Technologies is not responsible for damage to or loss of any programs, data, or removable
storage media and for the restoration or reinstallation of any programs or data other than software installed
by Innerspec Technologies when the product is manufactured.

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 60 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

Operations Manual
16. Contact Information
For any questions or comments concerning operation, spares, and sensors and attachments for this unit,
please contact Innerspec Technologies by regular mail, phone or e-mail.
Innerspec Technologies
4004 Murray Place
Lynchburg, VA24501
USA
Tel.
Fax.

+1-434-948-1301
+1-434-948-1313

For Technical Support:


For Spares:
For Additional Equipment:

PBsupport@innerspec.com
spares@innerspec.com
sales@innerspec.com

Check www.innerspec.com for the Latest Product Releases and News

TPBH-OM-G13

Page 61 of 61

ISO 9001:2008 Registered

S-ar putea să vă placă și